volvo op manual vnl & vnm 2001

353
Operator's Manual  VNL and VNM

Upload: thomas-s-fulford-iii

Post on 06-Apr-2018

257 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 1/352

Operator's Manual VNL and VNM

Page 2: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 2/352

ForewordThis manual contains information concerning the safe operation of yourvehicle. It is extremely important that this information is read and un-derstood before the vehicle is operated. This manual also contains aconsiderable amount of information concerning the vehicle, such as ve-hicle identication, Preventive Maintenance recommendations and a logfor your service records. Please keep this in the vehicle at all times. In-formation from other component manufacturers is supplied in separatemanuals in the Owner’s Package.

NOTE! It is important that this manual stay with the vehicle when it issold. Important safety information must be passed on to the new cus-tomer. The service information contained in this manual gives the

owner important information about maintaining the vehicle but is notintended as a substitute for the Preventive Maintenance Service Manualand must not be regarded as such.

The National Highway Trafc Safety Administration (NHTSA) andVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. (VTNA) should be informed imme-diately if you believe that the vehicle has a defect that could cause acrash, injury or death.

Contact NHTSA by calling the Auto Safety Hotline at 1 (800) 424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington, DC area) or by writing to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590.

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.Greensboro, NC USA

© 2001 Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Greensboro, NC USA

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in retrieval system, or transmitted in any forms by any means,electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Volvo Trucks North America, Inc..

Order number: PV776- TSP 20 154796

Page 3: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 3/352

ContentsGeneral Information ............................. 1

Information For the Owner ................... 1General Safety Information .................. 3Modications to Vehicle ....................... 7Exhaust and Noise Emissions ............... 8Vehicle Data ........................................ 16

Vehicle Access ...................................... 20Cab Doors and Door Lock ................. 20Cab Entry and Exit ............................. 22Luggage Compartment ........................ 29

Hood .................................................... 30

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Mainte-nance ..................................................... 32

General ................................................ 32Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List ........... 33Daily Maintenance .............................. 45

Additional Safety Features ................. 50Safety Belts ......................................... 50

SRS Airbag ......................................... 61Safety Equipment ................................ 68VORAD Collision Warning System ... 69

Instruments and Controls ................... 70Dash Overview .................................... 70Instrument Cluster Overview .............. 71Telltale Overview ................................ 72Graphic Display Telltale Overview .... 73Left Instrument Section ...................... 74Main Instrument Section ..................... 82Right Instrument Section .................... 89Changing Telltale Bulbs In Cluster .... 95Steering Column Switches .................. 97Left Switch Cluster ............................. 99Driving Light Switches ..................... 104Right Switch Cluster ......................... 106Pneumatic Switch Cluster ................. 110

Optional Switch Cluster .................... 112Miscellaneous Switches .................... 113

Graphic Display ................................. 114Graphic Display Overview ............... 114Graphic Display Controls ................. 115Graphic Display Telltales .................. 117Information and Stop Messages ....... 118Information Telltale ........................... 119Stop Telltale ...................................... 126Acknowledge Information and Stop

Messages ........................................... 130Main Menu: Set-Up Mode ............... 132Main Menu: System Diagnostic ....... 137Main Menu: Data Log Mode (VolvoEngine Only) ..................................... 152Main Menu: Password Input ............ 158Main Menu: Gauge ........................... 159Main Menu: Fuel Economy (option) 163Main Menu: Time/Distance .............. 165

Main Menu: FAULTS? ..................... 170

Heating and Air Conditioning ......... 174General .............................................. 174Climate Unit Main Control Panel .... 175Sleeper Climate Unit ......................... 183Cab Ventilation .................................. 185Cab Air Filters .................................. 187Parking Heater (optional) .................. 188

A/C Diagnostic Module .................... 194

Seats ..................................................... 195General .............................................. 195National Standard Seat Adjustments 196National Comfort Seat Adjustments . 197Volvo Standard Seat Adjustments .... 198Volvo Comfort Seat Adjustments ..... 199National Stationary Seat ................... 202

Page 4: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 4/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper .................. 203Interior/Reading Lights ..................... 203Storage Compartments ...................... 206Sleeper Bunks ................................... 212

VN-660 and VN–770 Sleeper Table 217Sleeper Compartment Sink ............... 220Miscellaneous Sleeper Equipment .... 224

Communication and Entertainment 231Antennas ............................................ 231Stereo/Radio ...................................... 233Communication Equipment .............. 234Television .......................................... 235

Fuel Economy Driving ...................... 237Fuel Economy ................................... 237

Engine Start and Operation ............. 244Starting the Engine ........................... 244Cold Weather Start and Operation ... 249Engine Operation .............................. 256Cruise Control ................................... 265Fuel Tank Cap(s) ............................... 267

Clutch and Transmission .................. 269Clutch ................................................ 269Folding Gear Lever (option) ............. 270

Brakes ................................................. 272

Brakes ................................................ 272

Electrical System ............................... 292Electrical System ............................... 292

Power Steering ................................... 309General .............................................. 309

Axles and Wheels ............................... 311Axles .................................................. 311Wheels ............................................... 313

Fifth Wheel Instructions ................... 316Fifth Wheel General Information ..... 316Fifth Wheel ....................................... 319

Fifth Wheel Slider (option) .............. 320Unlocking the Fifth Wheel ............... 321Trailer Coupling Procedures ............. 323Trailer Uncoupling Procedures ......... 328Operating the Volvo Slider ............... 333

Emergency Information .................... 335Towing Procedure ............................. 335

Service Information ........................... 341

Service Assistance and Manuals ...... 341

Index .................................................... 343

Page 5: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 5/352

Warning Label Information

IMPORTANTBefore driving this vehicle, be certain that you have read and thatyou fully understand each and every step of the driving and han-dling information in this Operator’s Manual. Be certain that youfully understand and follow all safety warnings. It is extremely im-portant that this information is read and understood before thevehicle is operated.

IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE FOLLOW-

ING INFORMATION CONCERNINGLABELS BE READ, UNDERSTOODAND ALWAYS FOLLOWED.

The following types of labels are usedthroughout this manual:

NOTE! A note denes an operating proce-

dure, practice, condition, etc., which isessential to proper operation of the vehicle.

CAUTIONA caution label directs the operator’sattention to unsafe practices where per-sonal injury is not likely but propertydamage could occur. The caution label isin black type on a white backgroundwith a black border.

WARNINGA warning label directs the operator’sattention to unsafe practices which couldresult in personal injury or severe dam-age to the vehicle. The warning label isin black type on a gray background

with a black border.

A danger label directs the operator’s at-tention to unsafe practices which couldresult in serious personal injury or death.The caution label is in white type on ablack background with a black border.

Page 6: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 6/352

General Information 1

Information For the OwnerIf there are questions on the maintenanceand performance of your vehicle, pleasediscuss them with your Volvo Truck dealer.Your authorized dealer is required to havetrained mechanics, special tools and spareparts to fully service your vehicle. If necessary, your dealer will contact the man-ufacturer for any assistance.

In addition to this Operator’s Manual, theremay be additional instruction/operator’smanuals supplied by component manufac-turers. These manuals are placed in the

Owner’s Package and placed in the cab. Besure to read all the manuals thoroughly be-fore operating the vehicle.

Also, various safety labels may be placedon components by the component manufac-turer. Be sure to read and follow theselabels to prevent damage to the vehicle,personal injury or even death.

Information in this manual refers to Volvo

components and Volvo drivetrain. Informa-tion concerning non-Volvo engines and/ordrivetrains can be obtained by contactingthe respective manufacturer.

Establish a Preventive Maintenance Pro-gram with the help of your local VolvoTruck dealer. A Preventive MaintenanceProgram makes it possible to maximize theamount of time your vehicle is up and run-ning, resulting in longer component life.This makes for a safer vehicle by reducingany mechanical failures due to poor mainte-nance practices.

Various truck warranty coverage plans, con-tingent on application and weight class, areavailable. Please contact an authorized

Volvo Truck Dealer for complete details.Replacement warranty certicates for VolvoTrucks are available from Volvo dealers.

For trucks placed in service after August 1,2000 and operating in the USA andCanada, Volvo dealers can print copies of the Standard Truck Warranty Certicateand the Premium (Purchased) Truck Cover-age Certicate. Copies are available ineither English or Canadian French at the

dealer communication system (DCS) web-site. Look in the Service/Warranty folder.

NOTE! Federal law requires manufacturersto notify owners of its products in the eventof a non-compliance to a Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard or if a safety re-lated defect is discovered. If you are notthe original owner of this vehicle, pleasenotify us about the change in ownership atthe address below or through an authorized

Volvo Truck dealer. This is the only waywe will be able to contact you if necessary.

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.

Att: Vehicle Registration Dept.

P. O. Box 26115

Greensboro, NC 27402–6115

United States of America

Page 7: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 7/352

2 General Information

Do Not Remove this manual from the ve-hicle. It contains important operational andsafety information that is needed by alldrivers and owners of this vehicle.

This Operator’s Manual covers Volvo VN-series vehicles manufactured by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. with any of thefollowing designations:

VNL42T VNM42T VNL42 VNM42

VNL64T VNM64T VNL64 VNM64

L=long hood, M=medium hood T=tractor

Explanation: The rst number after themodel designation represents the total num-ber of wheels (hubs) per vehicle. Thesecond number represents the number of wheels (hubs) that drive the vehicle. Eachmodel designation also carries a sufx,which identies the cab type.

This manual, together with manuals forspecic components, for example, Volvoengine, Cummins engine, Eaton transmis-sion, etc., contain important information tobe able to operate this vehicle safely. Theycontain advice and instructions which willenable you to get the operating economyand performance that you expect from thisquality vehicle.

All information, illustrations and specica-tions contained in this manual are basedupon the latest product information avail-able at the time of publication. If anyquestions arise concerning the current sta-tus of Federal or state laws, the appropriateFederal or state agency should be contacted.

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reservesthe right to make changes at any time or tochange specications or design without no-tice and without incurring obligation.

W0001619

VN cab types

Page 8: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 8/352

General Information 3

General Safety Information

Operating the VehicleEvery vehicle, including heavy duty vehi-cles, has blind spots. The size of blindspots varies from driver to driver and fromsituation to situation. As a skilled, profes-sional driver, you are in the best position toavoid accidents in turns, lane changes orother maneuvers. Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc. provides standard equipment(such as cabs, windshields, window sizesand mirrors), preferred by most owners anddrivers under most conditions and in mostapplications.

However, due to differences in the size of drivers, their seating positions, the way thatthey use and operate their vehicles, per-sonal preferences and other factors, nocombination of mirrors and other visibilityenhancement devices will eliminate allblind spots in every situation.

The safe operation of this vehicle is up toyou . Because of your special preferences,needs and circumstances, you may want toadd extra mirrors and/or other visibility en-hancement devices. If so, you shouldcontact an authorized Volvo Truck dealer toobtain those parts which best t your ownpersonal needs and preferences.

WARNINGAll items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a collision, loose items couldy around inside the cab. This couldcause personal injury.

Never try to operate or work on thisvehicle while under the inuence of al-cohol. Your reexes can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol. Drink-ing and operating this vehicle can leadto an accident, causing serious personalinjury or death.

Page 9: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 9/352

4 General Information

Operating In Bobtail ModeTractors are equipped with a bobtail airbrake proportioning valve which automati-cally redistributes the braking force between

front and rear axles when not hooked up toa semitrailer (bobtail operation).

When operating in bobtail mode, the rearbrake chambers receive reduced or propor-tional brake air pressure. When the tractoris towing a trailer, the rear brake chamberswill receive full (normal) brake pressure.

NOTE! When operating bobtail, be certainthat glad hands, trailer air hoses, electrical

cable and connectors are properly stowedand secure. Do not allow them to rub orchafe on other components.

WARNINGWhen operating bobtail, the brakesystem on the vehicle reduces the possi-bility of rear wheel brake lockup, excepton full pedal application. When bobtail-

ing, be certain that adequate pedalpressure is applied. There is no need toreduce pedal effort. Failure to do so mayresult in increased stopping distances.

Page 10: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 10/352

General Information 5

Do Not OverloadThis vehicle has been designed and assem-bled for a maximum gross vehicle weightrating (GVWR) and a maximum front and

rear axle weights rating (FAWR andRAWR). The actual rating for this vehiclecan be found on the label attached to thedoor frame on the driver’s side. If any of these three ratings is exceeded and over-loading occurs, instability, poor handling,failure of parts and accelerated wear canoccur.

Under no circumstances should the pub-lished GVWR, FAWR, and/or RAWR beexceeded. Failure to observe these pre-cautions can lead to the loss of vehiclecontrol, resulting in a crash causing seri-ous personal injury or death.

Do not exceed the load rating of thetires or the vehicle weight ratings. Over-loading may result in tire failure causingloss of vehicle control, leading to an ac-cident resulting in severe personal injuryor death.

W0001210

OperatingBefore driving this vehicle, locate the in-struments and controls, and becomethoroughly familiar with their operation.After starting and when driving, alwayscheck to make sure that the instrumentreadings are normal.

Page 11: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 11/352

6 General Information

Reporting Safety Defects

USAThe National Highway Trafc Safety Ad-ministration (NHTSA) and Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. should be informedimmediately if you believe that the vehiclehas a defect that could cause a crash, injuryor death.

Contact NHTSA by calling the Auto SafetyHotline at 1 (800) 424–9393 (or 366–0123in the Washington, DC area) or by writingto: NHTSA, U. S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington, DC 20590.

1 (800) 424-9393

CanadaRefer consumer complaints to Volvo TrucksCanada, Inc. or to the Transport Canada -Department of Public Complaints, Recallsand Investigations.

1 (905) 795-1555

MexicoVolvo Trucks of Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

should be informed immediately if you be-lieve the vehicle has a defect that couldcause a crash, injury or death. ContactVolvo Trucks de Mexico by calling or bywriting to: Volvo Trucks de Mexico, S.A.de C.V., Prol. Paseo de la Reforma 600,1er. Piso — 121, Col. Santa Fe PeñaBlanca, C.P. 01210, México, D.F.

01 (800) 90 94 900

NOTE! For a listing of other contacts forinformation or help, see page 341.

Page 12: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 12/352

General Information 7

Modications to VehicleChassis FrameFrame side rails are heat treated. No weld-ing is permitted because structural failuremay result. Do not drill through either topor bottom anges. A warning label is alsoattached to the frame for information.

Drilling is permitted in the frame web inaccordance with a specied hole spacingpattern. Consult a Volvo Truck dealer toobtain approved hole spacing dimensions orrefer to the Frame Rail and Cross MemberService Manual.

Frame rail and cross member nuts and boltsshould be checked periodically and tight-ened to the specied torque if necessary.

W7000519

WARNINGDo not weld on any part of the frame ordrill holes in the top or bottom anges.Serious structural damage could occur.

Frame AlterationsUnder no circumstances can the frame becut and an extension piece added to in-

crease the wheelbase. The only alterationallowed is wheel base shortening, wherethe only change in the frame rail is a newhole pattern drilled for the new location of the rear suspension.

Welding In VehicleDo not weld anywhere in or on the vehiclebefore disconnecting batteries, all electroniccontrol units (ECU) and instrument cluster.See page 298 for more information. Do notuse oxy/acetylene welding to repair cabpanels. Refer to the service manuals forspecic information.

Page 13: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 13/352

8 General Information

Exhaust and Noise EmissionsGeneral

USAThe Federal Clean Air Act, Section 203 (a)(3), states the following concerning the re-moval of air pollution control devices ormodication of a certied engine to a non-certied conguration:

“The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:

(3) For any person to remove or render in-operative any device or element of designinstalled on or in a motor vehicle or motorvehicle engine in compliance with regula-tions under this part prior to its sale anddelivery to the ultimate purchaser, or forany manufacturer or dealer knowingly toremove or render inoperative any such de-sign after sale and delivery to the ultimatepurchaser.”

Specically, please note that no person maymake such changes prior to the sale and

delivery of the vehicle to the ultimate pur-chaser, and, in addition, no manufacturer ordealer may make take such action after saleand delivery of the vehicle to the ultimatepurchaser. The law provides a penalty of upto $10,000 for each violation.

Modications, such as reprogramming of the fuel system so the engine will exceed

the certied horsepower or torque, or re-moving the mufers are examples of illegalchanges.

Changes should not be made to a certiedengine that would result in an engine thatdoes not match the conguration of an en-gine model that is currently certied tomeet Federal Standards.

CanadaThe same conditions that apply in the USAapply to Canada, with one exception. Afterthe vehicle is sold to a retail customer, thatis, the end user, the jurisdiction controllingthe emission control devices becomes theprovince in which the vehicle is licensed.No changes should be made that render anyor all of the devices inoperative.

Should the owner/operator wish to makeany changes to the emission control de-vices, check with the provincial authoritybefore making any such changes.

MexicoThe same conditions that apply in the USAapply to Mexico. Refer to the MexicanFederal Law for Emission Control whichadheres to EPA regulations. No changesshould be made that render any or all of the emissions control devices inoperative.

Should the owner/operator wish to makeany changes to the emission control de-vices, check with the state authority beforemaking any such changes.

Page 14: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 14/352

Page 15: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 15/352

10 General Information

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. WARRANTS TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER, ANDEACH SUBSEQUENT OWNER, OF A NEW TRUCK POWERED BY A VOLVODIESEL ENGINE THAT THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM OF YOUR TRUCK:

1 Is designed, built and equipped so as to conform at the time of sale to all regulationsof the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the California Air Resources Boardapplicable at the time of the manufacture; and

2 Is free from defects in material and workmanship which will cause the emission con-trol components not to function as designed for a period of use of 5 years or 100,000miles or 3,000 hours of engine operation, whichever comes rst.

The 5 years/100,000 miles/3,000 hour warranty period shall begin on the date the vehicleis rst delivered to the rst retail purchaser or if the vehicle is placed in service as ademonstrator company vehicle prior to the sale at retail, on the date the vehicle is the rstplaced in service.

The emission control system of your new Volvo engine was designed, built and tested us-ing genuine Volvo parts, and the engine is certied as being in conformity with Federaland California emission control regulations. Accordingly, it is recommended that any re-placement parts used for maintenance, replacement or repair without invalidating thiswarranty; the cost of such services or or parts, however, will not be covered under the war-ranty except in an emergency situation. A part not being available or a repair not beingcompleted within 30 days also constitutes an emergency.

Use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectivenessof emission control systems. If other than Volvo parts are used for maintenance, ownershould obtain assurances that suck parts are warranted by their manufacturer to be equiva-lent to genuine Volvo parts. However, the use of other than Volvo replacement parts doesnot invalidate the warranty on other components, unless such parts cause damage to war-ranted parts.

Repairs and service covered by the warranty will be performed by an authorized VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. dealer at his place of business with no charge for parts or la-bor (including diagnosis) using Volvo parts for the emission control system, that requiresreplacement and is covered by the warranty and found defective. In case of an emergency,where an authorized Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer is not available, repairs maybe performed at any available service establishment or by the owner, using any equivalentreplacement parts and Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will reimburse the owner for suchrepairs (including diagnosis) not to exceed Volvo Trucks North America, Inc’s suggestedretail retail price for the warranted parts and the labor rate appropriate for the geographicalarea and the tasks performed.

Replaced parts and paid invoices must be presented to a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.dealer for reimbursement.

Page 16: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 16/352

General Information 11

The emissions control parts covered by this Emission Control System Warranty are listedunder "What Is Covered by the Emissions Warranty." You are responsible for the perfor-mance of all required maintenance on your new Volvo engine, including maintenance orrepairs needed due to severe operating conditions. Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will

not deny a warranty claim solely because you have no record of maintenance. However,Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. may deny a warranty claim if your failure to performrequired maintenance resulted in the failure of a warranted part. Receipts covering theperformance of regular maintenance should be retained in the event questions arise con-cerning maintenance. The receipts should be transferred to each subsequent owner of thevehicle with the emission warranted engine.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. wishes to help to assure that the Emission Control Sys-tem Warranty is properly administered. In the event that you do not receive the warrantyservice to which you believe you are entitled under the Emission Control System Warranty,you should contact Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. Warranty Administration, (336) 393-2000. The address and telephone number of each Regional Ofce is in your vehicleowner’s manual. If you need additional assistance or information concerning the EmissionControl System Warranty, contact: Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Warranty Adminis-tration, (336) 393-2000.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY

This warranty does not cover:

1 Malfunctions in any part caused by any of the following: misuse, abuse, improperadjustments unless performed by a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer, modi-cations, alterations, tampering, disconnection, improper or inadequate maintenance, oruse of fuels not recommended for the engine as described in the owner’s manual.

2 Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other events beyond the control of Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.

3 The replacement of expendable maintenance items such as lters, hoses, belts, oil,thermostat and coolant made in connection with scheduled maintenance services oncethese parts have been replaced. Any parts replaced under warranty before the rst re-quired replacement point are warranted for the remainder of the warranty period.

4 Replacement items which are not genuine Volvo parts or not authorized by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc.

5 Loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of vehicle or engine, or commercial loss.6 Any vehicle on which the odometer or hourmeter has been disconnected or the

mileage (or hours) has been altered so the actual usage cannot be readily be deter-mined.

7 Any vehicle registered and normally operated outside the United States.

Page 17: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 17/352

12 General Information

WHAT IS COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY

The following is a list of the items that are considered a part of the Emission Control Sys-tems and are covered by the Emission Warranty when installed as original equipment byVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. on vehicles which were built to conform to Environ-mental Protection Agency and California Air Resources Board regulations

IMPORTANT - This may not include expendable maintenance items. Emission relatedparts requiring scheduled maintenance are warranted until their rst scheduled replacementpoint.

I. Fuel Injection System

II. Air Induction System

A. Intake Manifold

B. Turbocharge SystemC. Charge Air Cooler (Intercooler)

III. Exhaust Manifold

IV. Miscellaneous Items Used in Above Systems

A. Hose, clamps, ttings and tubing

B. Pulleys, belts and idlers

C. Vacuum, temperature, and time sensitive valves and switches

D. Mounting hardware, sealing gaskets and PVC (if applicable)

THIS CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT IN NO WAYREPLACES, MODIFIES, ALTERS OR SUPERSEDES THE TRUCK WARRANTY CER-

TIFICATE, ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS, AND ITSLIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS.

BE CERTAIN YOU READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL WARRANTIES WHICH

ACCOMPANIED YOUR VEHICLE.

NOTE! Warranty coverage is subject tochange without notice. Contact your VolvoTruck dealer for the current warrantystatement.

Page 18: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 18/352

General Information 13

Noise EmissionsVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. warrantsto the rst person who purchases this vehi-cle for purposes other than resale and to

each subsequent purchaser, that this vehicleas manufactured by Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc. was designed, built andequipped to conform, at the time it left thecontrol of Volvo Trucks North America,Inc., with all applicable U.S. EPA NoiseControl Regulations.

This warranty covers this vehicle as de-signed, built and equipped by Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc., and is not limited to

any particular part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. Defects in design, as-sembly or in any part, component or systemof the vehicle as manufactured by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc., which, at thetime it left the control of Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. caused noise emissionsto exceed Federal standards, are covered bythis warranty for the life of the vehicle.

Page 19: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 19/352

14 General Information

Tampering with Noise Control SystemFederal law prohibits the following acts orthe causing thereof:

(1) The removal or rendering inoperative byany person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of anydevice or element of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery tothe ultimate purchaser or while it is in use;

or

(2) the use of the vehicle after such deviceor element of design has been removed orrendered inoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitutetampering are the acts listed below:

Air Intake SystemRemoving or rendering inoperative the aircleaner or intake piping.

Engine Cooling FanRemoving or rendering inoperative the fanclutch.

Removing the fan shroud.

EngineRemoving or altering engine speed pro-gramming so as to allow engine speed toexceed manufacturer’s specications.

Modifying the parameters of the EngineElectronic Control Unit.

Page 20: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 20/352

General Information 15

Fuel SystemRemoving or altering engine speed pro-gramming so as to allow engine speed toexceed manufacturer’s specications.

Inner Fender Shields and Cab SkirtsRemoving shields or skirts.

Cutting away parts of shields, skirts or dam-aged or loose portions of shields or skirts.

Page 21: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 21/352

16 General Information

Vehicle DataIdentication and LabelsIt is extremely important that the correctvehicle model and serial number are givenwhenever replacement parts or service liter-ature are ordered. Using these numbers, aswell as giving the major component modeland serial numbers, will prevent delay anderrors in obtaining the correct material.Space is given on the rear inside cover of this manual for noting the main componentmodel and serial numbers.

The full 17–digit Vehicle IdenticationNumber (VIN) is shown on the VehicleIdentication label located in the dooropening on the driver’s side (see nextpage). The 8–digit chassis number is em-bossed into the bottom ange right handside of the frame rail and the top ange lefthand side of the frame rail, 42 inches (1065mm) back from the front edge of the framerail. The use of this number is very helpfulwhen ordering parts for your vehicle.

W0001995

Vehicle OrderThe Vehicle Order is a complete and de-tailed record of all data pertaining to theassembly of the vehicle. It should be led

in the Owner’s ofce where it will be read-ily available for reference. Any changesmade to the vehicle must become a part of the Vehicle Order and must comply with allapplicable Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

Page 22: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 22/352

General Information 17

Identication and Certication LabelsThere are two labels that are located on therear, lower face of the driver side doorframe. These should be part of the vehicleat all times.

The VIN is shown on the Vehicle Identi-cation label. The VIN includes the vehiclemake, model series, weight class, enginemodel, where the vehicle was built and thevehicle serial number. This label alsoshows the truck model designation, majorcomponent model and serial number, cabmodel and serial number, cab and chassispaint colors, and color numbers.

On the upper part of the door frame is theCertication label showing the axle andload ratings for the vehicle as it was built.Do not exceed these ratings by overloading.

NOTE! To deter tampering with the origi-nal build information, the information onthe label will be destroyed if label isremoved. If for any reason a label is dam-aged, contact your Volvo Truck dealer for areplacement.

W0001210

Noise Emission ControlA Noise Emission Control label is located

on the left end of the dash. It is theOwner’s responsibility to maintain the vehi-cle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.

Refer to page 14 for a listing of what con-stitutes tampering with the Noise EmissionsControl.

W0001458

Page 23: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 23/352

18 General Information

ComponentsThe Volvo D12 engine serial number is lo-cated on the rear, left side of the cylinderblock.

There is also a label on the engine elec-tronic control unit that shows the engineserial number.

W0001529

The Volvo D7 engine serial number is lo-cated on the rear, left side of the cylinderblock.

There is also a label on the rear valve coverthat shows the engine serial number.

W2002707

Page 24: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 24/352

General Information 19

The rear axle model and serial number islocated on the right side of the transfer gearhousing on the tandem front axle. It is lo-cated on the left side of the differentialhousing on the tandem rear axle and on theright side of the single axle.

W4000894

Page 25: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 25/352

20 Vehicle Access

Cab Doors and Door Lock The cab door is unlocked with the samekey used for the ignition lock. Keys can be

made to t only one vehicle or all the vehi-cles in a eet of Volvos. A tool forchanging bulbs in the instrument cluster isincluded on the keychain.

The key ts in the door lock either way.Insert the key and turn it 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to unlock or clockwise to lock the door.

NOTE! The vehicle is delivered with 2

identical keys. If more keys are needed,order them through your Volvo Truck au-thorized dealer. The keys are laser cut andrequire a special machine for copying,available through the dealer. Record the keycode and keep it in a secure place. A newkey can be made if the keys are lost.

The door locks are mechanically or electri-cally operated. The lock is activated byeither the key from the outside or the door

lock handle from the inside. With mechani-cal locks, only one door can belocked/unlocked at a time. With electricallocks, both doors will be locked/unlockedby operating either the key or the innerdoor lock handle on either side.

W0001231

Key code at the end of keychain

To lock either door from the inside, pushthe door lock handle forward. The handlewill stay in place, indicating the door islocked. It can be unlocked without openingthe door by moving the door lock handle tothe middle position.

No door can be locked while it is stillopen. The door must be closed for the lock to work. In the event of a power failure theelectrical lock system reverts back to a me-chanically functioning system.

W8001462

Page 26: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 26/352

Vehicle Access 21

The door has a position lock that enablesthe door to remain open in two differentpositions. An indented bar is holding thedoor at approximately 30 and in the fullyopen position at approximately 85 .

To close the door from the inside, place thehand in the handhold and pull the door in.

To lessen the chance of being thrownfrom the vehicle in case of an accident,

always lock the door and wear the safetybelt while driving. Failure to do so cancause serious personal injury or death if involved in an accident.

W8001854

CAUTIONDo not shut the door by pushing on thedoor panel. Hard pushing may distortthe metal in the door panel.

To close the door from the outside, placethe hand at against the door lock area andpush the door shut.

W8001853

Page 27: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 27/352

22 Vehicle Access

Cab Entry and ExitGeneral

Do not stand on the steps or any otherpart of the vehicle while it is in motion.The steps and the back of cab accessdeck plates are only for entering/exitingthe vehicle and not for riding on. Failureto heed this warning can result in seri-ous personal injury or death.

WARNINGWearing shoes with soles that are dirtyor wet increases the chance of slippingand falling. Be careful when entering thecab with dirty or wet soles.

WARNINGBoth the operator and passenger shouldexercise caution when entering or exitingthe cab. Use the steps and grab handlesto safely get in and out of the cab toprevent injuries related to a slip and fall.

Steps are designed to be slip resistantand to provide a stable surface forentering or exiting the cab. However, ac-cumulation of ice, dirt, lubricants, etc.on the steps can make entering or exit-ing hazardous. Always make sure thesteps are free from slippery substances.Failure to follow this guideline may re-sult in a fall that can cause seriouspersonal injury or death.

The steps on the vehicle are designed toconform with the requirements of 49 CFR399. You should familiarize yourself withthis Federal regulation.

W8000928

Page 28: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 28/352

Vehicle Access 23

General Entry Guidelines1 Always have three limbs (one foot and

two hands or two feet and one hand)in contact with the vehicle at all timeswhen entering or exiting the cab or thearea behind the cab.

2 Be certain you have a rm handholdand/or stable foot position beforetransferring weight to that position. Forexample, do not start to put weight ona foot until you are certain your foot isproperly on the step and will not slipwhen you transfer your weight.

3 Do not climb on top of the frame, fueltanks or storage boxes to make trailerhook-ups.

4 If the vehicle is equipped with air fair-ings, do not use the side mountedfairing (wind deector) brackets andbraces as steps or grab handles.

5 Be certain that the grab handles areclear of snow, mud, ice or other sub-stances that could make them slipperybefore using them. Do not use steps orgrab handles if they are slippery ordamaged.

6 Be certain that all grab handles, stepsand related parts are in good workingcondition. Any defects should be re-ported and repaired before using the

grab handles and steps.

7 Do not step on the curved surface of the fuel tanks. They may be slipperyfrom snow, mud, ice, water, spilledfuel or other slippery substances.

8 If a step is mounted to the top of thebattery box, be certain that the battery

box cover is properly fastened beforestepping.

9 Do not jump from the cab or from thesteps to the ground.

10 Always face the cab when entering orexiting.

11 Do not hold anything in your handswhen entering or exiting the cab or thearea behind the cab. Log books, cups,clipboards, jackets, luggage and thelike can be placed on the cab oor or

rear deck plate before entering or exit-ing.

12 Be sure to disconnect the safety beltbefore exiting the cab.

13 Be sure that the safety belt is fully re-tracted and out of the way prior toentering or exiting the cab.

14 Do not put your foot on any surfacethat does not have slip resistant, self cleaning material. If there is no stepmaterial, the surface may be slipperyand you could fall.

15 Before entering or exiting, be certainthat the soles of your shoes/boots arefree from grease, mud or any othersubstance which could make themslippery.

16 Always put the foot at on the top of the step. Do not place your foot on theside or edge of the step.

BE SURE TO FOLLOW ALL OFTHESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE EN-TERING OR EXITING THE CAB ORTHE AREA BEHIND THE CAB.

Page 29: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 29/352

24 Vehicle Access

Driver Side Entry/ExitOpen the door. Place any hand-carrieditems on the cab oor. Grasp the right grabhandle with your right hand and the leftgrab handle with your left hand. Put yourright foot fully on the bottom step and pullyourself up to the opening.

Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.Put your left foot on the top step and stepup. Step into the cab with your right footrst.

To exit, reverse the process. Do not attemptto exit the cab while carrying any items in

your hands.

WARNINGOn vehicles without side fairings, al-ways make sure that the battery boxcover is securely fastened before step-ping up. Failure to fasten the cover maylead to personal injury.

W0001223

Passenger Side Entry/ExitOpen the door. Place any hand-carrieditems on the cab oor. Grasp the left grabhandle with your left hand and the rightgrab handle with your right hand. Put yourleft foot fully on the bottom step and pullyourself up to the opening.

Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.Put your right foot on the top step and step

up.

Step into the cab with your left foot rst.

To exit, reverse the process. Do not attemptto exit the cab while carrying any items inyour hands.

W0001228

Page 30: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 30/352

Vehicle Access 25

Behind the Cab EntryWhen trailer air and electrical connectionscan not be coupled from the ground, Fed-eral Regulations require commercialcarriers to provide back-of-cab access steps,grab handles and plates.

Depending on what option is chosen, grabhandles are available in many variations. Ineach case, make sure to always have threelimbs (one foot and two hands or two feetand one hand) in contact with the vehicle atall times when entering or exiting the areabehind the cab.

WARNINGWearing shoes with soles that are dirtyor wet increases the chance of slippingor falling. Be careful when entering theback-of-cab area with dirty or wet soles.

W8001363

Grasp the grab handle to the left with bothhands. Put the left foot onto the bottomstep and pull yourself up. Put the right footon the top step and step onto the deck platewith the left foot.

WARNINGAlways perform trailer hook-ups whilestanding on the ground. Do not climb

on top of fuel tanks or frame rails tohook up or disconnect trailer air linesand electrical cord, or serious injuriescould result from a slip and fall.

W9000077

Page 31: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 31/352

26 Vehicle Access

Stand on the ground when connecting theair and electrical connections to the trailer.

W5000713

Entering Sleeper From Seat

Standard Gear LeverWhen moving from the driver seat to thesleeper section, follow this procedure:

• Make sure the parking brakes are set

• Place the gear shift lever in a gear po-sition toward the rear of the vehicle

• If equipped with an adjustable steeringcolumn, move the steering wheel upand forward

• Place the left hand on the steeringwheel and the right hand on the top of the gear lever

• Move the right foot out to the middleof the oor

• Lift the upper body, supported by thehands on the steering wheel and thegear lever and step out from the seatarea.

W8002037

Page 32: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 32/352

Vehicle Access 27

Folding Gear Lever (option)When moving from the driver seat to thesleeper section, follow this procedure:

• Make sure the parking brakes are set

• To release the gear lever, pull the levertoward the seat and press on the knobdownward in a straight line.

W4001388

• Twist the lever counterclockwise whileholding pressure on the knob. Whenreleasing the pressure, thespringloaded lever will be pushed upout of the locked position.

W4001389

• Lift and fold the gear lever straight

back, parallel with the seat. It willcome to rest in the folded position.

NOTE! If the lever is not foldedstraight back, it may not be able totravel the full distance.

W4001390

Page 33: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 33/352

28 Vehicle Access

• If equipped with an adjustable steeringcolumn, move the steering wheel upand forward

• Place the left hand on the steeringwheel and the right hand on the top of the dash

• Move the right foot out to the middleof the oor

• Lift the upper body, supported by thehands on the steering wheel and thedash and step out from the seat area.

When locking the gear lever in placeagain, follow the procedure on page 271.Failure to lock the gear lever properlyinto place can cause loss of control of vehicle, leading to serious personal in- jury or death. W4001391

Page 34: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 34/352

Vehicle Access 29

Luggage CompartmentTo gain access to the luggage compart-ments, there is a pull-ring connected to thelock, located at the lower rear corner of the

cab door opening on each side. Pull ring tounlock the door. The lock has a safety catchthat will hold the door in place, even if thedoor is not fully locked. To open door, holdpull-ring out while pulling the door out.

W8000984

The door swings out from the bottom onhinges mounted on the top. To assist inopening and to hold the door open, thereare two compressed gas cylinders mountedon each door. The door will swing up by it-self when pulled out a short distance andthen released. If the light switch is set onautomatic, the light will come on when thedoor opens.

W8001073

Safety equipment and tow hooks are storedin the luggage compartments. If equipped,the sleeper heater and air conditioning unitis located in the passenger side luggagecompartment.

WARNINGAlways place heavy objects in the lug-gage compartment. Sudden stops orsudden turns could cause personal injuryif heavy objects fall from overhead stor-age shelves.

W1000139

Page 35: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 35/352

30 Vehicle Access

HoodThe hood is locked down by two latches,one on each side of the back end of thehood. The latches are operated by a handle

on the bottom edge of the dashboard.

Pull the bottom of the handle out to releasehood. The hood will be raised about twoinches off its resting position and remainthere.

Make sure the hood can be opened fullywithout hitting anything. Stand sideways infront of the hood with feet in line with thevehicle. Place feet well apart and grasp therecessed handle in the front part of thehood. Transfer the body weight by leaningaway from the hood. Lift the hood until itis past the balance point. Release the hoodand let it complete the opening movementunaided.

Two restraint cylinders will engage duringthe last part of the opening. The cylinderswill slow and dampen the hood down to its

resting position.

WARNINGMake sure that no one is in the way of the hood when closing. The hood couldinjure a person in the way while beinglowered.

To close the hood, stand with feet well

apart and place the hands along the frontedge of the hood. Bend the knees and letthe leg muscles do the work when lifting.

Raise the hood up to the halfway point.Carefully guide the hood down withenough speed that the hood latches lock thehood in place when it comes to its normalresting position.

W8000986

W8000982

W8000983

Page 36: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 36/352

Vehicle Access 31

Manual Hood OpeningIn the event of a malfunction in the hoodopening mechanism, the hood latches canbe manually operated through an openingin the wheelwell splash shield. The openingis normally covered by a plate.

To access the opening, remove the twoscrews using a T30 Torx screwdriver. Re-move the cover plate.

W8002389

The hood latch can now be accessedthrough the hole. Operate the latch manu-ally by pushing the lever in toward theengine. Do the same on the other side.

W8000981

Page 37: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 37/352

32 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

General

Before working on or inspecting a vehi-cle, set the parking brakes, place thetransmission in neutral and block thewheels. Failure to do so can result in un-expected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

Safety is the most important and obviousreason for doing a pre-trip inspection. Fed-eral and state laws require inspection doneby the driver. Federal and state inspectorsalso inspect commercial vehicles. An un-safe vehicle can be placed “out of service”until the driver or owner corrects thedeciency. Owners and operators should fa-miliarize themselves with sections 49 CFR396.11 and 396.13 concerning Federal re-quirements for vehicle inspection. Certainother laws may also apply.

Section 49 CFR 396.13 states that all motorcarrier drivers must complete a written re-port at the end of each work day for eachvehicle operated, covering most of what iscovered in the pre-trip list. The reportshould list all defects or deciencies dis-covered by the driver. Doing a pre-tripinspection prepares for the end-of-work re-port.

Starting on the next page are suggestedguidelines to be used in performing truck,tractor and trailer pre-trip inspections. De-

pending on the application of the vehiclebeing used, these guidelines should bemodied to include other necessary inspec-tion points. For example, steps and grabhandles should be checked daily on refusetrucks because the operator is getting inand out of the cab more frequently.

If any component or system does not passthis inspection, it must be corrected beforeoperating the vehicle. Whenever equipmentrequires adjustment, replacement, repair or

lubrication, refer to the Service Manuals orcontact a Volvo Truck dealer for the correctprocedures, specications and intervals.

Take your time going through the pre-tripinspection. Remember that a careful pre-tripinspection saves time by eliminating un-scheduled stops for correcting a faulty item.

The following information has been

provided by the American Trucking Associ-ation as developed by the D.O.T. Ofce of Motor Carriers (BMCS).

Page 38: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 38/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 33

Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List

W0001230

Inspect the vehicle in a circular manner as shown in theillustration. Numbers between parentheses in the list, re-fer to pages in this manual where component functionand necessary inspection is explained in greater detail.

Approaching the Vehicle

• Check under the vehicle for oil, fuel,coolant leaks or other signs of damage.

• Check body surfaces for signs of breaks or damage.

Preparation

• Open drain cocks on air tanks to letthe tanks drain ( page 283).

• Chock wheels on vehicle and, if hooked up, trailer.

• Close air tank drain cocks.

• Start the engine and let the air pres-sure build up to normal ( page 273).Stop engine.

• Switch on parking lights and four-wayashers ( page 99).

• Apply parking brakes ( page 278).

• Release the hood latches ( page 30).Raise hood.

Step 1: Left Side Of the Cab

Left Front Wheel

• Check condition of wheel rim. Espe-cially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tire: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stem not touching wheel, rim orbrake drum; valve cap in place.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no ob-vious leaking on outside or insidewheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.

Left Front Suspension

• Check condition of spring, springhangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,breaks or shifting.

• Check shock absorber condition.

Page 39: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 39/352

34 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 1: Left Side Of the Cab (cont.)

Left Front Brake

• Condition of brake drum. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-tween lining and drum (This check cannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake air hose.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand bracket.

• Check slack adjuster and chamberpushrod travel.

Condition of Front Axle and Steering Sys-tem, Left Side

• No loose, worn, bent, damaged ormissing parts.

Under Hood, Left Side

• Check coolant hose condition.

• Check condition of fan drive belts.

•Check engine and surrounding areasfor coolant, oil and fuel leaks.

• Check wiring harnesses for signs of damage.

Step 2: Front Of Cab Area

Condition of Windshield

• Check for damage and clean if dirty( page 48 ).

• Check windshield wiper arms forproper spring tension.

• Check wiper blades for any damage,“dead” rubber and securement to arm.

Lights and Reectors

• Lower hood and inspect parking,clearance and identication lights onhood and cab. They should be clean,operating and of the proper color.

• Reectors clean and proper color.

• Turn on headlights. High and lowbeams should be operating and lensesclean. If equipped, check daytime run-ning lights.

• Left and right front turn signal lights

clean, operating and proper color.Raise hood.

Grille

• Check that charge air cooler and radia-tor or bugscreens are clean andundamaged.

Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area

Right Front Wheel

• Check condition of wheel rim. Espe-cially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tire: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stem not touching wheel, rim orbrake drum; valve cap in place.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no ob-vious leaking on outside or insidewheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.

Page 40: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 40/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 35

W0001230

Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area (cont.)

Right Front Suspension

•Check condition of spring, springhangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,breaks or shifting.

• Shock absorber condition.

Right Front Brake

• Condition of brake drum. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-tween lining and drum (This check cannot be made if dust covers are in

place).• Condition of brake air hose: check for

any chang.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand bracket.

• Check slack adjuster and chamberpushrod travel. With brakes applied orreleased, look for conspicuously dif-ferent positions of the slack adjusters.

Condition of Front Axle and Steering Sys-tem, Right Side

• No loose, worn, bent, damaged ormissing parts.

Under Hood, Right Side

• Check condition of coolant and heaterhoses.

• Check condition of fan drive belts.

• Check engine and surrounding areasfor coolant, oil and fuel leaks.

• Check fuel separator sight glass anddrain if necessary. Check for leaks.

• Check wiring harnesses for signs of damage.

• Check air lter with brackets andhoses for loose connections or dam-age. Check lter gauge, if mounted onthe lter.

Step 4: Right Saddle Tank Area

Right Fuel Tank(s)

• Securely mounted and not damaged orleaking.

• Fuel lines secure and not leaking.Check that shut-off valves are open.

• Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.

Page 41: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 41/352

36 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Condition of Visible Components

• Rear of engine: not leaking.

• Transmission: not leaking. If equipped

with oil cooler, check for leaks or thatair-to-air cooler is not blocked.

• Check drive shaft.

• Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.

• Frame and cross members: no bends,cracks or breaks.

• Air tubing and electrical wiring: se-cured against snagging and chang.

Step 5: Right Rear Vehicle Area

Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken spacers,studs, clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in placeand no objects stuck between thewheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and bias

type and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.

Suspension

• Check condition of springs (leaf orair), spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-tween lining and drum (This check cannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check forany chang.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes applied orreleased, look for conspicuously dif-ferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Step 6: Rear Of Vehicle Area

Frame Area

• Frame or cross members not bent,cracked or otherwise damaged ormissing.

• Check that air tubing and electricallines are properly secured to the framewith no damage or chang.

Lights and Reectors

• Tail lights, brake lights and turn signallights: operating, clean and propercolor.

Page 42: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 42/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 37

W0001230

Step 7: Coupling System Area

Fifth Wheel

• Securely mounted to the frame.

• No missing or damaged parts.

• Check that trunnion and plate areproperly lubricated ( page 318).

Sliding Fifth Wheel

• Mechanism not worn, bent, damagedor parts missing ( page 320).

• Properly lubricated.

• All locking pins present and locked inplace.

• If air operated: no air leaks.

Air Tubing and Electric Lines Visible FromThis Point

•Should be secure from dangling.

• Both air lines and electric line shouldbe free from damage, oil and grease.

Step 8: Left Saddle Tank and Left RearVehicle Wheels Area

Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken spacers,studs, clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in placeand no objects stuck between thewheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.

Suspension

• Check condition of springs (leaf orair), spring hangers, shackles andU-bolts, no cracks, breaks or shifting.

Page 43: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 43/352

38 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-tween lining and drum (This check cannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check forany chang.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes applied or

released, look for conspicuously dif-ferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Condition of Visible Components

• Transmission: not leaking.

• Drive shaft: looks OK.

• Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,

not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.

• Frame and cross members: no bends,cracks or breaks.

• Air tubing and electrical wiring: se-cured against snagging and chang.

Left Fuel Tank(s)

• Securely mounted and not damaged orleaking.

• Fuel lines secure and not leaking.Check that shut-off valves are open.

• Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.

Battery Area

• Open the battery box ( page 294). Bat-tery box securely mounted to vehicle.

• Batteries secured against movement( page 294).

• Battery cases not broken or leaking.Battery cables free from damage.

• Tops of batteries and terminals cleanand free from foreign material.

• If equipped, replace battery lid andmake sure it is securely fastened( page 295).

Page 44: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 44/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 39

W0001230

In the Cab

• Check steps and grab handles forlooseness or breakage ( page 23).

Also, clean them if there is any sub-stance that makes them slippery, whichmakes cab entry/exit hazardous.

• Start the engine. If equipped, check that exhaust rain cap opens when ac-celerating engine.

• Check gauges and telltale light func-tion ( page 85).

• Check function of low air warning( page 91). Check the Graphic Displayfor any fault codes ( page 114).

• Check clutch function ( page 269). If equipped, check for clutch brake func-tion.

• Check windshield wipers and washers( page 47) and horns, including back-up alarm, if equipped.

• Clean inside windshield, door win-dows and instruments. Clean mirrors.

• Check climate control and defroster( page 174). If equipped, check mirror

heater.

• Check condition of warning triangles,re extinguisher and ares ( page 68).

• Adjust the seat ( page 195). Check mirror adjustment.

• Check safety belts for function anddamage ( page 55).

•Apply service brakes. After initialdrop, pressure should hold steady, orincrease slightly, with engine at idle.

• Check steering wheel for excessivefree play.

• Check for loose items in the cab. Se-cure them if necessary.

Page 45: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 45/352

40 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Hooking Up To Trailer

Hook-up Preparation

• Check kingpin and mounting plate on

trailer, free from wear, bends or dam-age.

• Chock trailer wheels.

Fifth Wheel Or Trailer Hitch

• No visible space between fth wheeland trailer ( page 326).

• Locking jaws around the shank andnot the head of kingpin ( page 326).

• Release lever properly seated andsafety latch/lock engaged ( page 327).

• Check all connections to dolly ortrailer hitch and safety chains are se-cured.

• Check function of trailer air supplyvalve and trailer brakes.

Sliding Fifth Wheel

• Check that fth wheel is not so farforward that the tractor frame willstrike the landing gear during turns.

Page 46: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 46/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 41

W0001361

NOTE! Refer to the trailer manufacturer’smanual for specic information on thetrailer checks.

Step 9: Trailer Front Area

Air and Electrical Connections

• Glad hands properly mounted, freefrom damage and not leaking.

• Trailer cord receptacle properlymounted, free of damage; plug prop-erly seated and safety catch engagedto prevent accidental disconnect.

• Air and electrical lines properly se-cured against tangling, snagging andchang with sufcient slack for turns.

Step 10: Right Side of Trailer Area

Landing Gear or Dolly Area

• Fully raised; no missing or damagedparts.

• Crank handle present and secured.

• If power operated, no air/hydraulicleaks.

Spare Wheel(s)

• Carrier or rack not damaged.

• Spare wheel securely mounted in rack.

• Tire and wheel condition adequate fora spare: proper size, properly inated.

Lights and Reectors

• Trailer side clearance lights: clean, op-erating and proper color.

• Reectors clean and proper color.

Frame and Body

• Frame and crossmembers not bent,cracked, damaged or missing.

• Proper placarding.

• Body parts not damaged or missing.

Page 47: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 47/352

42 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 11: Right Rear Trailer Wheel

Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.

Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken spacers,studs, clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in placeand no objects stuck between thewheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.

Suspension

• Condition of springs (leaf or air),spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

• Condition of torque rod arms.

• If equipped with sliding axles, check position and alignment. Look for dam-aged, worn or missing parts, all lockspresent, fully in place and locked.

• Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,crimped or otherwise damaged. Se-cured against tangling, dragging andchang.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-

tween lining and drum (This check cannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check forany chang.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes applied orreleased, look for conspicuously dif-ferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.Step 12: Rear of Trailer Area

Lights and Reectors

• Rear clearance, identication and taillights clean, operating and propercolor.

• Reectors clean and proper color.

Cargo Securement

• Cargo properly blocked, braced, tied,chained, etc.

• Tailboard up and properly secured.End gates free from damage, properlysecured in stake pockets.

• Canvas or tarp (if required) properlylatched down to prevent water damage,tearing, billowing or blockage of eithermirrors or tail lights.

• Rear doors securely closed, latched orlocked; required security seals in place.

• Underside guard in place: not cracked,bent or broken.

Page 48: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 48/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 43

W0001361

NOTE! Refer to the trailer manufacturer’smanual for specic information on thetrailer checks.

Step 13: Left Rear Trailer Wheels Area

Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, lockringsmissing, bent or broken spacers, studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properly in-ated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in placeand no objects stuck between thewheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.

Suspension

• Condition of springs (leaf or air),spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

• Condition of torque rod arms.

• If equipped with sliding axles, check

position and alignment. Look for dam-aged, worn or missing parts, all lockspresent, fully in place and locked.

• Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,crimped or otherwise damaged. Itshould be secured against tangling,dragging and chang.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap be-tween lining and drum (This check can not be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check forany chang.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes applied orreleased, look for conspicuously dif-ferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Page 49: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 49/352

44 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 14: Left Side of Trailer Area

Landing Gear or Dolly Area

• Fully raised; no missing or damaged

parts.

• Crank handle present and secured.

• If power operated, no air/hydraulicleaks.

Spare Wheel(s)

• Spare wheel securely mounted in rack with no damage to rack.

• Tire and wheel condition adequate fora spare: proper size, properly inated.

Lights and Reectors

• Trailer side clearance lights: clean, op-erating and proper color.

• Reectors clean and proper color.

Frame and Body

• Frame and crossmembers not bent,cracked, damaged or missing.

• Proper placarding.

• Body parts not damaged or missing.

Before Leaving the Parking Area

• Remove chocks from the wheels.

• Test trailer hook-up by slowly pulling

while applying the trailer brakes withthe trailer brake hand control valve.

• Test the service brakes before leavingthe parking area.

• Test parking brakes by stopping on a20% grade and applying the parkingbrakes. The parking brakes shall holdthe combined vehicle and trailer with-out moving.

Page 50: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 50/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 45

Daily MaintenanceThe following should be checked daily inaddition to doing the pre-trip inspection of the truck or tractor and trailer.

While checking the uid levels, visually in-spect hoses, pipes and their connections forsigns of leakage. Inspect the ground underengine, transmission and rear axle(s) forsigns of leakage.

Before working on or inspecting a vehi-cle, set the parking brakes, place thetransmission in neutral and block thewheels . Failure to do so can result inunexpected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

Check coolant level in the coolant tank.The level should be above the minimummark shown on the side of the tank.

WARNINGDo not remove the cap to the surge tank while the engine and radiator are stillhot and under pressure. Scalding uidand/or steam may be blown out underpressure if the cap is taken off too soon.

If the coolant level is low, add more

coolant to the tank so the level is above theminimum mark. Coolant should be lledthrough the cap in the middle of the tank.

CAUTIONTo prevent cooling system damage, addonly pre-mixed coolant made up of 50%clean water and 50% antifreeze. See the“Operator’s Manual, Maintenance &

Engine ” for more detailed information.

W2002049

Page 51: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 51/352

Page 52: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 52/352

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 47

Check uid level in the clutch uid reser-voir. Fluid level should be between thelevel marks on the reservoir.

If uid needs to be added, use brake uid,DOT 4.

W4000726

Check level in the windshield washer reser-voir. If washer uid needs to be added, usea commercially reputable washer uid thathas good cleaning capability and does notfreeze in cold weather.

Total reservoir capacity is 3.3 gallons(12.5 liters). An indicator will appear onthe diagnostic display when there isapproximately 1.4 gallons (5.3 liters) re-maining in the reservoir. W8000985

Check that windshield wipers and washerare working properly.

The windshield washer spray should cover

the windshield well. The wipers shouldclean the windshield in a couple of strokesand should not leave any streaks.

W3000874

Page 53: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 53/352

48 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

If the windshield needs an overall cleaning,use a long handled cleaning sponge andsqueegee.

Clean the side windows in the same waywith a long handled sponge and squeegee.

W1000070

Check all lights for proper function:

• Headlights

•Daytime running lights

• Parking and marker lights

• Stoplights

• Turn signals

W3000953

NOTE! Make sure that all uid levels areat their proper levels. If the uids are not attheir proper levels, add as necessary. Refer

to the Engine and Maintenance Manual forinformation on what types of uids are rec-ommended for your Volvo vehicle.

Page 54: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 54/352

Page 55: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 55/352

50 Additional Safety Features

Safety BeltsGeneral

Safety belts must be properly worn at alltimes by the driver and all passengerswhile the vehicle is in motion even if the vehicle is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS or airbag). Failure to do so can result in seri-ous personal injury or death in the event

of a sudden stop or collision.

Fasten the safety belt before starting todrive. Trying to fasten the safety beltwhile the vehicle is moving may lead toan accident, causing serious personal in- jury or death.

Safety belt assemblies installed in this vehi-cle meet FMVSS 209, “Type 1” and “Type2” requirements. They are recommendedfor all persons weighing over 50 lb (25 kg).

W8001834

A child restraint system should also be pro-vided for each child weighing 50 lb (25 kg)or less. It should meet the requirements of FMVSS 213, “Child Restraint System.”Carefully read and follow all manufac-turer’s instructions on installation and use.Make certain the child remains in the re-straint system at all times while the vehicleis in motion.

W8002741

Page 56: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 56/352

Additional Safety Features 51

Safety belts must be worn by the driver andall passengers at all times. Before adjustingor fastening the safety belt, move the seatforward or rearward and adjust the seatheight as necessary. Sit erect and adjust theseat cushion and seat back for a comfort-able driving position. In the event of acollision, a correct driving position maxi-mizes the effectiveness of the safety belt.

There are both Federal and State laws gov-erning the use of safety belts. As lawsdiffer from state to state, make yourself fa-miliar with the current rules.

W8001077

Tether straps are installed on allsuspension-type seats. Tether straps help se-cure the seat to the oor and are intendedto restrain the seat and safety belt in caseof an accident or sudden stop.

The tethers are not adjustable and do notneed any adjustment.

W8001387

Page 57: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 57/352

52 Additional Safety Features

Operating the Safety BeltTo fasten the safety belt, pull the belt outfrom the retractor and insert the latch intothe buckle. Verify proper lock of the latch

by pulling on the latch.Adjust the slack by pulling on the top partof the belt until the lower part, or the partthat crosses the lap, is snugly adjusted. Re-lease the top part and let the retractor pullthe belt in.

The lap portion of the safety belt should beworn low across the pelvic region (hipbone) and adjusted snugly. Never adjust the

lap belt across the abdomen. A push buttonon the buckle is used to release the safetybelt latch by pushing in the button releaseon the buckle.

W8001835

The buckle portion of the safety belt sys-tem is different depending on the seatoption chosen. The National standard andcomfort seat has a separate buckle that isattached to a oor anchor by a seat strap.

This seat strap is not adjustable, and doesnot need to be adjusted.

The buckle for the seat is bolted to the seatoor.

W8001836

If a comfort clip is used on the safety belt,always adjust the latch so that there is a

maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) slack betweenthe belt and chest (about the width of twongers). If a larger slack is allowed, the ef-fectiveness of the safety belt is decreased inthe event of a collision. Operation of theclip is described on page 60.

Make sure the safety belt is completely re-tracted and out of the way when not in use.

W8001837

Page 58: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 58/352

Additional Safety Features 53

Sleeper Safety Restraint

Always use the safety restraint when thevehicle is in motion. Failure to do so notonly may cause severe injuries or deathto the passenger in the event of an acci-dent but also poses a danger of injuriesto other occupants of the vehicle.

Anytime the vehicle is in motion, a pas-senger using the sleeper bunk should bestrapped in using the safety restraint.The top bunk should always be usedwith the harness in place, whether thevehicle is in motion or not. Falling fromthe upper bunk can result in severe per-sonal injury or death.

The restraint netting can be used for secur-ing loose articles. Any loose articles thatcan shift in the cab during hard corneringor braking should be kept restrained.

W8000895

Fasten the restraint by connecting thebuckle with the latch. Make sure the beltsare not twisted. Test the latch connectionby pulling on the belt. If they come apart,reconnect and test again. If the connectioncan not be made, replace the belt before us-ing the bunk for sleeping during driving.

To loosen the restraint, press the red releasebutton on the latch (1). Restraints should beproperly stored when not used. Having therestraint laying loose in the cab can be asource for unintentional snagging.

W8002475

Page 59: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 59/352

54 Additional Safety Features

Safety Restraint — VN-420, VN–610 and VN–660The restraint has latches in one end andbuckles in the other so it can only be in-stalled one way. Connect the restraint to theback wall and the buckles on the oor. Con-nect the side tethers and adjust the straps toform a “tent” over the bunk (VN-660 upperbunk does not have the “tenting” feature).

W8002039

Safety Restraint — VN-770Connect the restraint to the back wall rst.The wall connectors are located in the stor-age units. Connect the lower part of therestraint to the lower buckles. Connect theside tethers and adjust the straps to form a“tent” over the bunk.

NOTE! The restraints for top and bottombunks are different. Each belt can only beinstalled to the correct bunk.

Page 60: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 60/352

Additional Safety Features 55

Inspection

Failure to properly inspect and maintainthe safety belts can cause serious per-sonal injury or death.

It is critical that any time a vehicle hasbeen involved in an accident, the entiresafety belt system must be replaced in

the vehicle (which also includes thesleeper bunk restraints) if they were inuse at the time of the accident. Failureto replace the safety belt system may re-sult in serious injury or death.

A damaged safety belt, whether visiblydamaged or not, could result in seriouspersonal injury in the event of an acci-dent. The safety belt systems should bereplaced at least every ve years.

Do not bleach or re-dye the color web-bing because it may cause a severe lossof belt strength. This loss of strength

could allow the safety belt to break under stress, thus resulting in severe per-sonal injury or death.

Check the belts, buckles, latch plates, re-tractors, anchorages, and guide loops to

ensure that they are working properly. Look for loose/damaged parts (without disassem-bling) that could keep the restraint systemfrom working properly. If the safety belt,retractor and hardware were in use during acollision, they must be replaced. The re-straint system anchorage fasteners must bereplaced if necessary. If there is any doubtabout the restraint system’s effectiveness,replace the entire safety belt assembly.

Page 61: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 61/352

56 Additional Safety Features

The following maintenance guidelines de-tail how to inspect safety belts and tethersfor cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wearof the webbing, etc., and damage to thebuckle, retractor, hardware or other factorswhich indicate that safety belt system re-placement is necessary.

Check the web wear at the buckle/latcharea. The webbing must be closely exam-ined to determine if there are any cuts,fraying or extreme wear in the webbing.Cuts, fraying or excessive wear would indi-cate the need for replacement of the safety

belt system.

W8001406

The D-loop web guide is an area where al-most constant movement of the safety beltwebbing occurs because of the relativemovement between the seat and the cab.This constant movement forms an areawhere wear will often occur. The webbingmust be closely examined to determine if there are any cuts, fraying or extreme wearin the webbing. Cuts, fraying or excessivewear would indicate the need for replace-ment of the safety belt system.

W8002478

Page 62: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 62/352

Additional Safety Features 57

Check to make sure that the D-loop webguide is rotating properly. If the guide isnot rotating properly, the webbing will pullat the wrong angle through the guide, ac-celerating wear.

W8002477

If equipped, check the comfort clip forcracks or possible damage. Make sure thatit works properly.

Check the buckle by inserting the latch andverifying proper operation. Determine if thelatch plate is worn or deformed. Check thebuckle and latch casing for cracks orbreakage.

W8001404

Page 63: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 63/352

58 Additional Safety Features

The retractor web storage device ismounted on the B-pillar, just behind thedoor in the cab. The retractor is the heart of the safety belt system and can be damagedif abused, even unintentionally. Check theretractor web storage device operation toensure that it is not locked and that it spoolsout and retracts the webbing properly.

W8002481

If tethers are being used to anchor thesafety belts to the oor, make sure that theyare properly attached to the seat. Tethersmust also be inspected for web wear andproper tightness of mounting hardware.

W8001387

All hardware for safety belt mountingpoints should be evaluated for corrosion.All attachment points of the system shouldbe checked for tightness of mountinghardware.

Check the web in areas exposed to ultra-violet rays from the sun or extreme dust ordirt. If the original color of the web inthese areas is extremely faded, the physicalstrength of this web may have deteriorated.If this condition exists, replace the safetybelt system.

Page 64: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 64/352

Additional Safety Features 59

Important Facts About Safety Belts in Heavy TrucksThe high mileage associated with heavytrucks, the continual relative movement of

the seat with the cab, the possible contactwith the vehicle seat or other parts of thecab structure, and the potential exposure of this safety belt to severe environmental con-ditions make it crucial to inspect the seatbelt system regularly. It is recommendedthat the system be inspected every 15,000miles (24,000 km) or more often if the ve-hicle is exposed to severe environmental orvocational conditions. Any safety belt sys-tem that shows cuts, fraying, extreme orunusual wear, signicant discolorations dueto ultra-violet ray exposure, dusty-dirtyconditions, abrasion to the safety belt web-bing or damage to the buckle, latch plate,retractor, hardware or any other obviousproblem should be replaced immediately,regardless of the mileage.

Once replacement of the safety belt hasbeen determined necessary, be certain that

it is replaced only with a Volvo original re-placement safety belt. See your authorizedVolvo Truck dealer for replacement. YourVolvo safety belt system has been devel-oped and tested specically for heavytrucks. Replace it only with the exact samedesign that the vehicle was equipped with.

If the inspection indicates that any otherpart of the safety belt system requires re-placement, the entire belt system must be

replaced. An installation guide is attachedto every replacement system, entitled“Three-Point Safety Belt InstallationGuide.” There are separate safety beltinstruction guides for suspension and sta-tionary seats. Use the proper guide for yourtype of seat and follow the instructionsvery closely. It is vitally important that allcomponents are mounted back in the samepositions as the original components thatwere removed. This will maintain the de-sign integrity of the mounting points for thesafety belt assembly.

Page 65: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 65/352

60 Additional Safety Features

Comfort Clip OperationWhen provided, the comfort clip is locatedon the shoulder strap just below the D-ring.

When adjusting the comfort clip, the fol-lowing procedure must be followed forproper adjustment:

1 Pull out only enough webbing to allowslight pressure to the shoulder andchest. Allow no more than a 1 in.(25 mm) slack when measured be-tween the chest and the belt.

2 To activate the clip mechanism feature,lift the lever up to clamp the webbingin place.

NOTE! When the safety belt is not in use,the clip should be in the open position toallow the seat belt to retract to its properposition. Also make sure that the adjust-ment of the comfort clip does not interferewith the operation of the safety belt.

W8002388

Open position

Always adjust the clip so that there is amaximum of 1 in. (25 mm) of slack be-tween the belt and chest (about two ngerswidth). If a larger slack is allowed, the ef-fectiveness of the safety belt is decreased inthe event of a collision.

W8001837

Page 66: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 66/352

Additional Safety Features 61

SRS Airbag

WARNING

The SRS airbag is intended to supple-ment — not replace — the standardsafety belt. The airbag is not deployedwhen the truck is hit from behind, fromthe side or if it rolls over. For best pro-tection, sit in a normal, upright position.Always wear the safety belt .

For added safety, the vehicle may beequipped with an airbag or SRS (Supple-mental Restraint System) as a supplement

to the standard three-point anchored safetybelt. The SRS is designed to reduce the risk of injury to the driver’s face and upper partof the body. Together with the safety belt,the airbag helps prevent the driver from be-ing thrown against the steering wheel,windshield or other hard surfaces in the cab.

The Volvo SRS Airbag provides increasedprotection in frontal collisions, where thevehicle collides with a xed or heavy objectwith enough force to activate the sensorswhich then activates the airbag. Damage tothe vehicle is not always proportional towhether the SRS Airbag deploys or not.

The SRS Airbag is not designed to be acti-vated with:

• Collision from the sides• Collision from the rear• Rolling over

• Head-on collisions at low speed oragainst soft objects such as bushes,snow drifts, etc.

Page 67: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 67/352

62 Additional Safety Features

SRS SystemThe inatable airbag is folded into the cen-ter of the steering wheel. It inates in theevent of a serious collision above a certain

level, where the angle of impact, crashseverity, speed and nature of the object in-volved in the collision all play a part inwhether or not the airbag is activated.

T8006849

The system consists of a gas generator sur-rounded by the inatable airbag. In theevent of a sufciently violent collision, acontrol unit activates the gas generator ig-nitor and the airbag inates. To cushion theimpact, the airbag deates when com-pressed. This also releases some non-toxicsmoke into the cab. The entire sequence,from ination to deation of the airbag,takes a few tenths of a second.

WARNINGNever attempt to drive with a deployedairbag. With the bag hanging out of thehub of the steering wheel, the truck maybe more difcult to steer. In addition,other safety systems may be damaged.

Continuous exposure to the smoke anddust created during the deployment of the airbag can cause irritation to the skinand eyes.

T8006855

Page 68: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 68/352

Additional Safety Features 63

The SRS system is continually monitoredby the control unit. A control unit ismounted on a bracket above the enginecover which detects deceleration. The con-trol unit also contains a standby power unitwhich can supply the system with powerfor a short time, should the normal supplybe broken.

If the control unit detects a sufciently vio-lent deceleration (collision), the system isactivated. The gas generator triggers andlls the bag with a non-toxic gas within afew hundredths of a second. During a colli-sion, after the bag has been lled, gas ows

out through two holes in the weave. Theseholes are large enough to let the airbag col-lapse slowly, gently catching the driver.

T8006857

In the event of a problem in the SRS sys-tem, a telltale shows on the graphic displayin the instrument cluster. This telltale, to-gether with other telltales in the cluster,also light up when the engine is started.The telltale should go out after approxi-mately 10 seconds when the starting keyhas been turned to the drive position.

If a problem develops in the system, the1 INFO telltale will come on together withthe SRS telltale.

CAUTIONThe vehicle should be taken to an autho-rized Volvo Truck dealer immediately if the SRS telltale stays on or lights upwhen the vehicle is being driven.

W3000982

Page 69: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 69/352

64 Additional Safety Features

Warning LabelsThe label attached to the left hand sunvisorshows the year and month when a VolvoTruck dealer should be contacted for aspecic inspection and for a possible re-placement of the airbag. This is done toguarantee the function of the airbag afterthe stated date. Replace the label when re-placing the airbag module. Never attemptto make any adjustments to SRS compo-nents yourself.

T8006843

Steering shafts and steering wheel shouldnot be removed, adjusted or replaced with-out following the proper work procedure.Failure to do so can damage the SRS sys-tem to the point where it does not work anylonger. A warning label is located on theupper steering shaft.

T8006842

There is also a label on the inside of thewindshield that indicates the inclusion of an airbag to the vehicle safety features.

T8006841

When equipped with an airbag, a labelabout the correct procedure for protectingsmall children and protecting the driver isattached to the left hand, overhead storagelid or back of sunvisor.

W8002741

Page 70: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 70/352

Additional Safety Features 65

Any queries concerning the SRS systemshould be directed to a Volvo Truck dealer.There is no maintenance required for theSRS system until the date stated on thewarning label located on the left hand sun-visor.

Never attempt to repair any part of theSRS system. Any interference with thesystem may cause it to malfunction andresult in serious injury or death. Work on the system may only be carried out

by an authorized Volvo Truck dealer.

To allow the SRS system to work as de-signed:

• Never drive an SRS system equippedvehicle with the hands on the steeringwheel pad/airbag module.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SRS cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Page 71: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 71/352

66 Additional Safety Features

General Information

When is the airbag deployed?The airbag is only deployed during a head-

on collision , where the vehicle hits a xedor heavy object with sufcient force. TheSRS system registers both the force of thecollision and the internal forces caused bythe collision. The control unit determines if the collision is sufciently violent for theairbag to be deployed.

NOTE! The SRS system is only activatedonce in a collision. If the airbag has de-ployed, the following is recommended:

• Have the vehicle towed to a VolvoTruck dealer. Even if the vehicle canbe driven after a collision, it is notrecommended to drive the truckwith the airbag deployed.

• Have an authorized Volvo Truck dealerchange the components in the SRSsystem.

• Only use original Volvo parts when re-placing the SRS system components(airbag, safety belt, etc.).

When is the airbag not deployed?Not all frontal collisions activate the SRSsystem. In a collision with a soft object (asnow drift or bush for example, or a hardor xed object at low speed), there is no

need for the SRS system to be activated.The airbag is usually not inated in re-sponse to side-on collisions, impacts fromthe rear or if the vehicle overturns. The ex-tent of damage to the vehicle is no measureof how well the SRS system works.

Page 72: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 72/352

Additional Safety Features 67

Can the airbag be deployed acci-dentally?The complete SRS system is constructed sothat the airbag only inates in particularcollision conditions. The SRS system hasits own diagnostic unit which continuouslymonitors the functioning of the system.Make a habit of checking the SRS systemtelltale light when starting and driving thevehicle.

Heart of the Volvo safety systemThe three-point anchored safety belt isthe heart of the Volvo safety system. Thebelt should be worn at all times . The SRSsystem is intended as a supplement to thethree-point anchored safety belt.

Page 73: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 73/352

68 Additional Safety Features

Safety EquipmentSafety triangles and re extinguishers areavailable as optional equipment. The reextinguisher should be located by the base

of the driver seat, between the seat and thedoor. Depending on the cab style, thesafety triangles are located in differentplaces in the cab.

W1000071

Day CabThe warning triangles are stored in a box

that is strapped to the back wall.

W0001372

Sleeper CabThe warning triangles are stored in a boxthat is strapped to the inner wall of theright side luggage compartment.

W1000139

Page 74: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 74/352

Additional Safety Features 69

VORAD Collision Warning SystemThe Eaton VORAD computerized CollisionWarning System constantly monitor vehi-cles ahead with a front end mounted radar

and in a blind spot area with an optionalside mounted radar. The Collision WarningSystem warns the driver of potentially dan-gerous situations by activating visual andaudible alerts.

The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem is intended solely as an aid foran alert and conscientious professionaldriver. It is not to be used or relied uponto operate the vehicle. Use this systemtogether with rear view mirrors andother instrumentation to maintain safeoperation of the vehicle. Operate a VO-RAD equipped vehicle in the same safemanner as if VORAD was not installed.The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem is not a substitute for safe driv-

ing procedures nor will it compensatefor any driver impairment, such asdrugs, alcohol or fatigue.The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem may provide little or no warningfor some hazards like: alerts for pedes-trians, animals, oncoming vehicles andcross trafc. SmartCruise will not reactto stationary objects and it does not havethe capability to stop the vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions maylead to a crash resulting in severe per-sonal injury or death.

If your vehicle is equipped with the EatonVORAD Collision Warning System, readthe manufacturer’s Driver Reference Man-ual before taking the vehicle on the road.

Page 75: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 75/352

70 Instruments and Controls

Dash Overview

W8002383

1 Air Vents ( page 182)

2 Diagnostic Test Connection3 Left Switch Cluster ( page 99)4 Headlight Switch ( page 104)5 Driving/Fog Lights - option ( page 105)6 Instrument Light Dimmer ( page 113)7 Climate Unit Control Panel ( page 174)8 Hood Latch Handle ( page 30)9 Pneumatic Switches ( page 110)10 Cigar Lighter ( page 113)

11 Ashtray

12 Instrument Cluster, Left ( page 74)13 Instrument Cluster, Main ( page 82)14 Instrument Cluster, Right ( page 89)15 Trailer Hand Brake Control ( page 283)16 Tractor Parking Brake ( page 278)17 Trailer Air Supply ( page 278)18 Radio - option ( page 233)19 Optional Switches ( page 112)20 Right Switch Cluster ( page 106)

OperatingBefore driving this vehicle, locate the in-struments and controls, and becomethoroughly familiar with their operation.After starting and when driving, alwayscheck that the instrument readings arenormal.

NOTE! Availability of gauges depends onchosen options. All gauges and telltalesmay not be used in all vehicles.

Page 76: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 76/352

Instruments and Controls 71

Instrument Cluster Overview

W3004396

General

The cluster is available in seven differentcongurations, with the speedometer eithergraded in mph or km/h. The cluster con-sists of three combined sections:

Left Section

The left section can include pyrometer, en-gine oil pressure gauge, engine coolanttemperature gauge, turbo boost pressuregauge and a graphic display for driverinformation. See page 74 for gauge infor-mation and page 114 for graphic displayinformation. There are telltales in the lower

part. Please refer to page 77 for telltaleinformation.

Center Section

The center section contains tachometer,speedometer and odometer. See page 82 forgauge information. In the lower part thereis a central warning lamp and telltales for

different vehicle functions. Please refer topage 85 for telltale information.

Right Section

The right section can include forward andrear axle temperature gauges, fuel levelgauge, application air pressure gauge, frontand rear brake air pressure gauges. Vehicleswith rear air suspension may have an airsuspension pressure gauge. See page 89 for

gauge information. There are telltales in thelower part. Please refer to page 92 for tell-tale information.

Page 77: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 77/352

72 Instruments and Controls

Telltale Overview

W3004406

1 Engine Preheat ( page 78)2 Yellow 1 INFO Light

( page 79)3 Red 1 STOP Light

( page 80)4 No Charge ( page 81)5 Left Turn ( page 86)6 Fifth Wheel Lock ( page 86)7 Wheel Differential Lock

( page 86)8 Axle Differential Lock

( page 86)9 High Beam ( page 87)10 Safety Belt ( page 87)11 Parking Brakes ( page 87)12 Tractor ABS ( page 88)

13 Trailer ABS ( page 88)14 Air Suspension Level

( page 88)15 Mirror Heater ( page 88)16 Right Turn ( page 86)17 Transmission Temperature

( page 92)18 Check Transmission

( page 92)

19 Traction Control System( page 92)

20 Wait to Start (Not used)21 Transmission in Neutral

( page 92)22 Water in Fuel (Not used)

Page 78: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 78/352

Instruments and Controls 73

Graphic Display Telltale Overview

W3003534

1 Voltmeter ( page 162)2 Engine oil temperature ( page 159)3 Transmission oil temperature

( page 125)4 Preheating active ( page 78)5 Acknowledged warning ( page 130)6 Alarm clock on ( page 167)7 PTO engaged ( page 101)8 Cruise control engaged ( page 265)9 Airbag (SRS) ( page 63)

10 Coolant level ( page 126)11 Washer uid level ( page 120)12 Engine airlter clogged ( page 121)13 Too cold for engine brake ( page 289)14 Overheating, instrument cluster

( page 120)15 Engine preheat fault ( page 249)16 Engine oil pressure ( page 76)17 Coolant temperature ( page 75)

Page 79: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 79/352

74 Instruments and Controls

Left Instrument Section

A Pyrometer (option) (this page)

B Engine Coolant Temperature( page 75)

C Engine Oil Pressure ( page 76)

D Turbo Boost Pressure (option)( page 77)

E Graphic Display ( page 114)

F Telltale Indicators ( page 77)

W3003644

A — Pyrometer (option)An engine pyrometer system indicates theexhaust temperature, which helps the opera-tor get the best efciency from the engine.

Variations in engine load can cause the ex-haust temperature to vary. For example,high exhaust gas temperature is the resultof prolonged engine lugging or overfueling.If the pyrometer reading shows that exhausttemperature exceeds normal, reduce fuel tothe engine until exhaust temperature is re-duced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine isoverloaded. W3003632

Page 80: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 80/352

Instruments and Controls 75

B — Engine Coolant TemperatureThe gauge indicates engine coolant temper-ature. Normal operating temperaturereading is 165 to 205 F (75 to 95 C) for

the VOLVO engine. The temperature, undernormal driving conditions, must be belowthe red sector. The temperature range forthe coolant will vary depending on the typeof engine, load, grade, ambient air tempera-ture and operating conditions. If thetemperature remains below or exceeds thenormal temperature range, the cooling sys-tem should be checked for problems byyour Volvo Truck dealer.

W3003769

The LED light in the lower right corner of the gauge lights up solid when coolant tem-perature is excessive. The temperature limitis dependent on the engine manufacturerelectronic program. Together with thegauge light, the red 1 STOP telltale willcome on and the buzzer will also sound.The engine is at risk and the engine con-troller may react by derating the enginepower. Stop at the rst safe place where theproblem can be checked.

NOTE! If the coolant temperature returnsto normal shortly after exceeding the limitand no repair has been made, the warningmessages go out but there will be a faultmessage logged.

W3003614

T3008861

Page 81: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 81/352

76 Instruments and Controls

C — Engine Oil PressureThe gauge indicates oil pressure by a sensordirectly connected to the engine lubricationsystem. Normal oil pressure is 30 to 70 psi

(210 to 480 kPa) when the engine is at nor-mal operating temperature. At idle speed,the pressure may drop to 5 to 20 psi (35 to140 kPa). When rst starting a cold engine,oil pressure may exceed 90 psi (620 kPa).

The LED light in the lower right corner of the gauge lights up solid when the oil pres-sure is too low. The pressure limit isdependent on the engine manufacturer elec-tronic program. When the gauge light

comes on, the red 1 STOP telltale startsblinking, the buzzer sounds and the oilpressure symbol appears on the graphic dis-play. The engine is at risk and the enginecontroller may react by derating the enginepower, for example. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

With very low oil pressure, the red 1 STOPtelltale lights up solid. The engine will shutdown within 30 seconds from when thelight came on. Pull off the road as soon aspossible without being a safety hazard.

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown and

loss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur.

W3003768

W3003613

T3008861

Page 82: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 82/352

Instruments and Controls 77

D — Turbo Boost Pressure (option)The gauge indicates intake manifold pres-sure on the engine. The pressure isgenerated by the turbo. Boost pressure

should be the same at a given engine tem-perature, speed and load. Turbo boostpressure will vary for different engines andvehicle models. By monitoring the gauge,the operator can avoid engine problems.

W3003631

F — Telltale Indicators, Left Section

1 Engine preheat telltale ( page 78)

2 Caution telltale ( page 79)

3 Stop telltale ( page 80)

4 No Charge telltale ( page 81)W3003645

Page 83: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 83/352

78 Instruments and Controls

1 — Engine Preheat TelltaleThe amber telltale will light up when theintake manifold preheater is operating. Theheater is used for better cold starts. Opera-tion time of the heater can vary in severalsteps from 0 to 50 seconds depending oncoolant temperature and outside air temper-ature. On cold mornings, the preheater willbe on for the maximum 50 seconds. Whenthe ignition key has been turned to the pre-heat position, the preheater coils in theintake manifold are activated to warm theintake air. Once the engine is started, thepreheater may be re-engaged to assist in aquicker engine warm-up. See page 249 for

information on using the preheater.

T3008841

Page 84: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 84/352

Instruments and Controls 79

2 — 1 INFO Telltale

The yellow 1 INFO telltale lights up to in-

dicate a control system or componentmalfunction. In some cases, the enginepower may be derated (see page 120).When the telltale comes on, stop at the rstsafe place where the problem can bechecked.

When ignition is switched on, the telltalegoes out unless a defect is detected.

NOTE! On vehicles equipped with a Volvo

engine, the telltale is on for 3 to 5 secondsafter the ignition key switch is turned on.

See page 119 for a listing on related mes-sages that trigger this telltale.

T3008860

Page 85: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 85/352

80 Instruments and Controls

3 — 1 STOP Telltale

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur.

The 1 STOP telltale lights up red to alertthe operator that a severe problem has beendetected and in some cases a preventive ac-tion may be taken by the engine electronicsto protect the engine. For example: if oilpressure or coolant level drops too low, theengine will be forced to low idle and whenthe vehicle speed is zero, the engine shutsdown. Another example is: with excessivecoolant temperature, the engine will gradu-ally reduce power output to 50%. Thistelltale always activates the buzzer.

The engine may be started again after thekey is turned off and then back on. How-ever, it will only operate for 30 secondsunless the problem is resolved.

CAUTIONIf the problem is allowed to persist, seri-ous damage to the engine may occur.Always repair the cause of the problem

before taking the vehicle into serviceagain.

The engine could be forced to low idlewithin 30 seconds from when the lightcame on. Pull off the road as soon as possi-ble without being a safety hazard.

See page 126 for a listing on related mes-sages that trigger this telltale.

T3008861

Page 86: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 86/352

Instruments and Controls 81

4 — No Charge TelltaleThe No Charge telltale lights up red whena problem exists in the charging system orwhen there is no output from the alternator,such as when the engine is not running.

The No Charge telltale lights up dimlywhen there are several volts difference be-tween the system voltage and the alternatoroutput voltage. The telltale shines brighteras the alternator output voltage drops.

For more information on the electrical sys-tem, see page 293.

T3008832

Page 87: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 87/352

82 Instruments and Controls

Main Instrument SectionG Tachometer ( this page)

H Speedometer ( page 83)

J Master Warning Telltale ( page 84)

K Warning Telltales ( page 85)

W3003643

G — TachometerThe tachometer is electrically driven by asignal from the engine. Monitor thetachometer to guide correct gear shiftingand to prevent engine overspeeding whendescending steep grades. Each engine hasits ideal operating ranges for power andeconomy. Read the engine manufacturer’smanual to nd out the best ranges for eachengine.

CAUTIONAlways keep an eye on the tachometerduring downhill runs. Do not allow theengine to over-speed. Excessive engineover-speed can result in serious enginedamage.

W3003639

Page 88: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 88/352

Instruments and Controls 83

H — Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer is driven by the vehicle’selectronic system. Recalibration of thespeedometer can be made to compensate

for tire size changes or other changes in thevehicle driveline. This is done by repro-gramming the engine or transmissionelectronic controller. Reprogramming canbe performed by your authorized VolvoTruck dealer.

The odometer is a Liquid Crystal Display(LCD) mounted in the lower speedometerface. The odometer registers up to999,999.9 miles or km. The internal elec-

tronics will make distance conversionsbetween miles and km automatically.

To be able to read the current mileagewithout turning the ignition on, press anygraphic display control to activate theodometer and clock for approximately 30seconds.

W3003640

Page 89: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 89/352

84 Instruments and Controls

J — Master Warning Telltale

The Master Warning Telltale and buzzeralerts of a dangerous situation. Air pres-sure is low and the remaining air volumemay not be enough for repeated braking.The emergency brakes may engage,causing a wheel lock-up, loss of vehiclecontrol and become a hazard to follow-ing vehicles. Bring the vehicle to acontroled stop. Failure to follow theseprecautions can result in loss of braking

control and serious personal injury ordeath can occur as a result of a vehicleaccident.

This will light up when either front or rearair brake system pressure drops below 60psi (410 kPa) or lower. The buzzer willalso sound when the telltale lights up.When the pressure goes above 60 psi inboth front and rear brake circuits, the tell-tale will automatically go out.

Air brake system pressure should be be-tween 90 to 135 psi (620 to 930 kPa) fornormal operation. The master warning tell-tale comes on and the buzzer sounds whenair pressure has dropped to 60 psi or lower.If the air pressure is allowed to drop below30 to 40 psi (200 to 275 kPa) in bothsystems, the parking spring brakes will au-tomatically engage and stop the vehicle.

When the master warning telltale comes onand before the parking spring brakes en-gage, stop the vehicle in a controlledmanner at an off-road location so as not tobe a hazard to other vehicles on the road.Refer to page 273 for more informationabout the brakes.

W3000638

Page 90: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 90/352

Instruments and Controls 85

K — Warning Telltales, Center Section

W3003646

1 Left Turn Telltale ( page 86)

2 Fifth Wheel Lock Telltale ( page 86)

3 Wheel Diff. Lock Telltale ( page 86)

4 Interaxle Diff. Lock Telltale ( page 86)

5 High Beam Telltale ( page 87)

6 Safety Belt Telltale ( page 87)

7 Parking Brake Telltale ( page 87)

8 Anti-Lock Brake System (Tractor orTruck) Telltale ( page 88)

9 Anti-Lock Brake System (Trailer)Telltale ( page 88)

10 Air Suspension System Telltale( page 88)

11 Mirror Defroster Telltale ( page 88)

12 Right Turn Telltale ( page 86)

NOTE! All telltales may not be used in allvehicles.

The telltale strip is located below thetachometer and speedometer. A yellow cau-tion telltale indicates that there is a systemor component in the vehicle that requiresthe operator’s attention. A red warning tell-tale indicates that there is a system orcomponent that should be checked beforethe vehicle is driven any further.

Page 91: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 91/352

86 Instruments and Controls

Left and Right Turn TelltalesThis lights up green when the turn signal isactivated and blinks in time with the out-side turn signal lamps. An audible signalalso sounds in time with the telltale. A sin-gle short beep is heard when the telltalelights up.

W3000903

5th Wheel Lock TelltaleThis telltale will light up yellow when thepneumatic switch for the 5th wheel slidelock is turned on. It will stay lit until theswitch is turned to the off position again.See the 5th wheel uncoupling section onpage 333 for correct use.

W3000621

Wheel and Interaxle Differential Lock TelltalesThese telltales will light up yellow when

the pneumatic switches for either the wheelor interaxle differential lock are turned on.

For the interaxle lock, the telltale is acti-vated by the switch. For the wheel lock, aswitch in the axle turns the telltale light ononly when the lock is actually engaged. Itturns the light off only when the lock is ac-tually disengaged. See page 311 for properdifferential lock use.

W3000904

Page 92: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 92/352

Instruments and Controls 87

High Beam TelltaleAny time the high beams are activated, bythe high/low beam switch or the high beamash switch, the telltale lights up blue. Forinformation on switching high/low beam,see page 97. W3001303

Safety Belt TelltaleThe telltale lights up red each time the ig-nition is turned on to remind the driver tofasten the safety belt. It stays lit for 10 sec-onds and then goes out automatically.

Before adjusting the safety belt, make surethe vehicle is stationary and that the seathas been adjusted as required. Do not at-tempt to adjust the safety belt or seat whilethe vehicle is in motion. For proper use of the safety belt, see page 52.

W3000625

Parking Brake TelltaleThe telltale lights up red when the parkingbrake valve knob is pulled out. The day-time running light (DRL) function is alsodependent on the parking brake application.Any time the parking brake telltale is on,the DRL is deactivated.

Never exit your vehicle unless the park-ing brake is set. Failure to do so canresult in unexpected vehicle movementand cause personal injury or death.

For proper use of the parking brake, seepage 278.

W3000627

Page 93: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 93/352

88 Instruments and Controls

ABS Telltale, Tractor and TrailerThe telltale lights up amber if the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) senses aproblem under the following conditions:

1 The system will go through its self test when the ignition switch is turnedon and the telltale should continue tobe on. The light should go out whenthe vehicle speed reaches over approx-imately 7 mph (11 km/h). If thetelltale stays on at higher speed, thereis a problem with the ABS.

2 The ABS telltale lights up during driv-ing. The ABS self test has detected afault in the system.

The vehicle can still be driven with a prob-lem in the ABS. However, the ABS will notbe operating and standard air braking is ineffect. For more information, see page 285.

The trailer ABS telltale is in effect for ve-hicles manufactured after February 2001.

W3000905

Air Suspension TelltaleThe telltale lights up amber when the sus-pension leveling valve is activated. As longas the switch is activated, the suspension islower than normal and the telltale is on. Forproper use of the suspension level control,see fth wheel uncoupling on page 329.

W3002596

Mirror Defroster Telltale (option)The telltale lights up amber when the mir-ror defrost switch is engaged. Heatertemperature is automatically regulated byan internal system in the mirror head.

W3000632

Page 94: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 94/352

Instruments and Controls 89

Right Instrument Section

L Forward Drive Axle Oil Temperature

(option) ( this page)

M Rear Drive Axle Oil Temperature(option) ( this page)

N Fuel Level Gauge ( page 90)

O Application Air Pressure (option)( page 90)ORAir Suspension Pressure (option)

( page 90)P Front Brake System Air Pressure

( page 91)

Q Rear Brake System Air Pressure( page 91)

R Warning Telltales ( page 92)

W3004407

L & M — Forward & Rear Drive Axle Oil Temperature (option)

The gauges are connected to temperaturesenders installed in the axles. Normal oper-ating temperature range is up to 250 F(120 C). If average oil temperature consis-tently goes above 250 F (120 C), morefrequent oil changes are needed or an oilcooler could be installed.

CAUTIONA sudden increase in oil temperaturethat is not caused by a load increasemay indicate mechanical failure. Bringthe vehicle to a safe stop where theproblem can be checked. Do not operatevehicle until correcting the problem.

W3003634

Page 95: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 95/352

90 Instruments and Controls

N — Fuel Level GaugeThe gauge is connected to a sending unit inthe fuel tank. There is only one sender even

if the vehicle is equipped with dual tanks.

W3003628

O — Application Air Brake Pressure (option)

Air gauges are directly connected to the airbrake system. They will indicate the brakeapplication pressure from either the front,rear or trailer circuit pressure.

The gauge will not register air pressure un-

til the foot brake pedal is depressed or thetrailer hand brake is applied.

W3004302

O — Air Suspension Pressure (option)

Air gauges are directly connected to the airsuspension system. It will indicate the sus-pension pressure in the air springs.

The pressure shown on the gauge is a crudeindication of the load on the rear axle(s).The gauge should not be used for trying tobalance the load between the axles.

W3003633

Page 96: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 96/352

Instruments and Controls 91

P & Q — Front and Rear Brake System Air Pressures

The system air gauges are directly con-nected to the front and rear circuit tanks.The two gauges should register equal airpressure. Air brake system pressure shouldbe between 90 to 135 psi (620 to 930 kPa)for normal operation. The pointers in thetwo gauges should register equal air pres-sure. By observing the gauge pointers, theoperator can detect a pressure drop if an airleak develops and can readily identify thecircuit affected. See page 273 for more in-formation.

There is a low-air warning switch in eachgauge. If the pressure in a brake circuit airtank drops below approximately 60 psi(420 kPa), the red indicator in the lowerright corner of the gauge will light up andthe master warning indicator and the buzzerwill simultaneously come on. If the airpressure is allowed to drop below 30 to 40psi (205 to 275 kPa) in both systems, theparking brakes will automatically engage tostop the vehicle. Refer to page 273 formore information about the brakes.

Failure to observe these precautions canresult in the loss of braking performanceand personal injury or death can occuras a result of a vehicle crash.

W3003637

W3000638

Master Warning Indicator

Page 97: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 97/352

92 Instruments and Controls

R — Warning Telltales, Right Section

1 Transmission Temperature (this page)

2 Check Transmission (this page)3 Traction Control System ( page 93)

4 Wait to Start (Not used)

5 Automatic Neutral ( page 94)

6 Water in Fuel (Not used)

W3004416

Transmission Temperature TelltaleThe Transmission Temperature Telltale isfor the Allison WTEC III transmission. Theamber warning signal lights up and abuzzer sounds when the transmission tem-perature is too high.

W3004305

Check Transmission TelltaleThe Check Transmission Telltale is for theAllison WTEC III transmission. The redwarning signal lights up to indicate a trans-mission problem. Depending on the severityof the problem, shifts may be restricted.

W3004306

Page 98: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 98/352

Instruments and Controls 93

Traction Control System TelltaleThe amber telltale will blink only when theTraction Control System (TCS) mud/snowmode is engaged. At all other times, theTCS system operates in the backgroundwithout indication. The system does nothave an on/off switch. See page 287 formore information.

The TCS only operates at speeds lowerthan 25 mph (40 km/h). The system detectswheel spin by comparing wheel speeds andcontrols the spin by using the brake systemto transfer power to wheels with greatertraction. Under circumstances where all

drive wheels are spinning, the system sendsa signal to the engine control unit to reducepower.

W3000962

The TCS includes a TCS mud/snow switchfor turning the system off to increase wheelspin. This function may be desirable indeep snow or mud to keep the vehicle frombogging down.

To operate, press in the bottom part of theswitch. The switch stays in this positionand the TCS telltale light blinks to indicatethat the mud/snow mode is engaged. To re-turn to normal TCS operation, press thebottom part of the switch again and it willreturn to rest position.

W3001336

Page 99: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 99/352

94 Instruments and Controls

Auto Neutral TelltaleThe Auto Neutral Telltale is for the AllisonWTEC III transmission. The green indica-tor lights up when the transmission is inauto neutral. Auto neutral is activated justbefore the vehicle comes to a complete stop(less than 1.5 mph [2.5 km/h]). The gear isre-engaged shortly (1–2 seconds) after thebrake pedal is released.

Allow for the gear re-engagement when ap-plying throttle; do not increase enginespeed before the transmission has engaged.If the engine speed is too high, the trans-mission will not engage.

CAUTIONWhen operating the vehicle on normalgrades (less than 4%), a slight roll-back can be experienced when the brakepedal is released and before the trans-mission re-engages.

NOTE! When operating on severe grades

(more than 5%), the transmission has asafety feature that can be used. Before re-leasing the brake pedal, manually press the“DRIVE” key on the Allison gear selector,and the gear is re-engaged manually to as-sist in preventing roll-back.

W3004308

Page 100: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 100/352

Instruments and Controls 95

Changing Telltale Bulbs In ClusterNOTE! Before beginning to work, makesure the vehicle ignition is switched OFF.

If possible, adjust the steering columnback. Remove the two screws at the top of the instrument cluster and fold the clusterout and let it rest face-down against thesteering column so the bulbs are accessible.

CAUTIONDo not let the cluster be in theface-down position for more than maxi-

mum 15 minutes. Damage to the gaugescan occur by oil running out of them,making the gauge reading inaccurate.

W3000842

Do not use any other tools for changing thebulbs than the correct tool. Using a pair of pliers could easily cause a short-circuit if power is on, thereby destroying the circuitboard.

W3001306

Page 101: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 101/352

96 Instruments and Controls

A bulb change tool can be ordered fromyour Volvo Truck dealer under part number1089953. Use only this tool to changebulbs in the instrument cluster.

To remove bulb, insert tool onto the bulbassembly, rotate a 1/4 turn counterclock-wise and pull the bulb assembly out of thecluster.

Insert a new bulb into the tool and install itinto the cluster. Rotate the bulb a 1/4 turnclockwise and pull the tool off of the bulbassembly.

NOTE! The telltale area in the right part of the instrument does not use all spaces foractive telltales. These bulbs can be used forspare bulbs.

Lift up the instrument cluster and fasten thetwo screws at the top of the cluster.

W3000642

Page 102: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 102/352

Instruments and Controls 97

Steering Column SwitchesTurn Signal/Headlight Beam ChangeThe turn signal is activated by the lever un-der the left side of the steering wheel. If the vehicle is equipped with a cruise con-trol, the controls for this are located on theturn signal lever. See page 265 for more in-formation about the cruise control.

The standard turn signal switch is self can-celling. It must be manually returned toneutral position after making a turn. A self cancelling turn signal is available as an op-tion.

For lane changes, the lever does not needto be moved to a locking position. Movethe lever partway off the normal positionuntil a resistance is felt. The turn signal isnow activated and the lever will return tonormal position when it is released.

The headlight ash function is activated bypulling the turn signal lever toward thesteering wheel. The high beam will stay onuntil the lever is released.

To change between high and low beam,pull the lever all the way toward the steer-ing wheel. When a slight clicking sound isheard, release the lever.

NOTE! When switching from high to lowbeam for oncoming trafc, release the leveras soon as the beam change is made. Hold-ing the lever up makes the headlight ashfunction stay engaged.

W2002694

W3000903

W3001303

Page 103: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 103/352

98 Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe wiper/washer functions are operated bythe same switch. The wipers have a normaland a fast speed which are activated bymoving the lever down one or two posi-tions. To let the wipers engage for one ortwo passes, lightly depress the lever untilthe wipers start and hold it there. Thewipers return to the parking position whenthe lever is released.

The interval wiper function is engaged bymoving the lever up. The normal pro-grammed speed is one pass every 10seconds. To shorten the interval time, move

the lever to normal wipe position and thento the interval position again when the nextwiper pass is desired. In this way, the inter-val can be programmed between 1 to 10seconds between each pass.

W3003655

To operate the windshield washer, pull thelever toward the steering wheel. If washeruid needs to be added, use a commerciallyreputable washer uid that has good clean-

ing capability and does not freeze in coldweather. Total reservoir capacity is 3.3 gal-lons (12.5 liters).

W8000985

An indicator will appear on the graphic dis-

play and the yellow1

INFO telltale lightsup when the water uid is low. A 10 sec-ond activation delay allows for uid slosh.

T3008838

Page 104: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 104/352

Instruments and Controls 99

Left Switch ClusterThis switch cluster has only one switch po-sition permanently lled. Other positionsare for optional equipment. The standard

switch is for the Hazard Lights.Other switches that can be located in thiscluster are for Back of Cab Light, Head-light Flash, Dome Fluorescent Light inVN-660 & VN–770 and Power Take Off.

W3002002

Hazard LightsThe hazard or four-way warning circuit isactivated by pressing in the bottom part of the switch. The indicator light in the switchwill ash in unison with the outside lights.The hazard lights function independentlyfrom the ignition switch.

Activate this function only when the vehi-cle is stopped where it might be a dangerto other vehicles or to alert others of aproblem that changes the trafc rhythm.

W3001350

Back Of Cab Light (option)Turn on the back of cab light by pressingin the bottom part of the switch. The lightwill stay on until the switch is returned tooff-position.

Back-of-cab lights are available as a ush-

mounted light in the middle of the cab rearwall or as a high-mounted light on the sideof the cab. W3001355

Page 105: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 105/352

100 Instruments and Controls

Headlight Flash Switch (option)The headlight ash switch will momentar-ily turn the headlights off when pressed.The switch will return when released, turn-ing headlights on again. This switchfunctions when either of Daytime RunningLights or low beam headlights are on.

W3002306

Sleeper Overhead Lighting, VN–770

This operates the uorescent overheadlighting in the VN-770 sleeper cab. It is lo-cated so the light can be accessed withoutentering the sleeper section of the cab.

The switch works together with the switchon the sleeper control panel (see page 204).Depending on the position of the otherswitch, switching on the light may have tobe done by pressing in the top or the bot-tom part of the switch.

W3001351

Page 106: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 106/352

Instruments and Controls 101

Power Take OffThere are two basic types of PTOs avail-able: engine mounted and transmissionmounted. The transmission mounted PTO isclutch dependent, which means that opera-tion can be regulated by depressing orreleasing the clutch pedal. This type of PTO should not be in use while driving.

The engine mounted PTO is direct-mountedto the engine and is engaged with a bypassvalve operated by the switch. This type of PTO can be in use while driving.

NOTE! If your vehicle is equipped withAutoshift and a Detroit Diesel engine, thePTO telltale may blink when Autoshift ison and the transmission shifts gears.

Transmission Mounted PTO

The vehicle should be stopped before en-gaging power take off. Engage the PTO bydepressing the clutch pedal and pressing inthe bottom part of the switch. Release theclutch pedal to start the PTO.

One or two PTOs can be run at the sametime. Applications change depending oncustomer needs and components.

W3001994

Page 107: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 107/352

102 Instruments and Controls

Engine Mounted PTO

The engine should be running at low idleand the vehicle should be stopped or run-ning at very low speed before engagingpower take off. Engage the PTO by press-ing in the bottom part of the switch. ThePTO is now in operation and hydraulic owcan be regulated by the engine speed. W3001993

Page 108: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 108/352

Instruments and Controls 103

PTO Speed AdjustmentHave the PTO engaged before adjusting thespeed. For the PTO speed adjustment tofunction, the Cruise Control or idle adjustcan not be active, brake and clutch pedalsmust be released, and vehicle speed mustbe under approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

To set engine speed:

1 Set the PTO/CC switch in the ON po-sition.

2 Use the accelerator to increase enginespeed.

3 Momentarily press the SET+ or SET-switch to set current engine speed.

To increase/decrease engine speed:

1 Press and release the SET+ or SET-toggle switch to increase/decreasespeed in increments (increment sizedepend on programmed value).

2 Press and hold the SET+ or SET- tog-gle switch to increase/decrease speed.

When the switch is released, the en-gine speed sets at current speed.

To resume engine speed:

1 If the PTO function was interrupted,resume set speed by pressing thePTO/CC switch to RESUME and re-leasing.

To deactivate PTO speed function:

1 Set the PTO/CC switch to the OFF po-sition.

2 Press down the service brake pedal.

3 Depress the clutch pedal.

4 Increase vehicle speed above PTOworking range (typically 5 mph [8km/h]).

W3002499

Page 109: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 109/352

104 Instruments and Controls

Driving Light Switches

HeadlightsThe headlight switch controls parking lightsand headlights. It is a two position rotaryswitch, turning on parking lights, cabmarker lamps and taillights in the rst posi-tion and turning on headlights in thesecond position.

To change between high and low beam,pull the direction indicator lever all the waytoward the steering wheel. When a slight

clicking sound is heard, release the lever.

NOTE! When switching from high to lowbeam for oncoming trafc, release the leveras soon as the beam change is made. Hold-ing the lever up makes the headlight ashfunction stay engaged.

W3000955

The headlight is combined into one aerody-namic assembly. The halogen bulbs areaccessed from the rear of the assembly.Headlights do not need to be checked foraim after bulb replacement. For more infor-mation on changing the headlight bulb, seepage 308.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are stan-dard. They are automatically switched on

when the parking brakes are released (igni-tion must be on) and will stay on until theparking brakes are engaged.

NOTE! Do not use DRL at night or at anytime visibility is reduced. DRL is not asubstitute for the main vehicle lights whendriving at night.

W3000953

Page 110: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 110/352

Instruments and Controls 105

Driving and Fog Lights (option)Combinations of driving and fog lights canbe mounted in standard locations in theaerodynamic bumper or from the undersideof the steel bumper. These are operated bya switch next to the headlight switch.

Fog and driving lights are wired so they areturned on only when the headlight switch ison. Fog lights are used with the parkinglights and the low beam headlights. Drivinglights are used with the high beam head-lights. Switching from low to high beamwill automatically switch from fog lights todriving lights.

Driving and fog lights should be used whendriving conditions require additional light-ing. The driving or fog lights should not beused in trafc where they might distractother drivers thereby creating a safety haz-ard.

If the fog/driving lights are added to the ve-hicle as an accessory later on, make sure thelight controls are wired as described above.

W3000954

W3001356

Page 111: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 111/352

106 Instruments and Controls

Right Switch ClusterThis switch cluster can hold up to sixoptional equipment switches. Planned func-tions are Marker Interrupt, Traction Control

(TCS), Exhaust or Engine Brake andHeated Mirrors.

W3000972

Marker Interrupt SwitchThe switch interrupts power to the markerlights when held down. When released, itwill spring back to the ON position and re-turn power to the marker lights.

W3001352

Traction Control SwitchIf the vehicle is equipped with a TractionControl System (TCS), there is a switchthat can be used for increasing wheel spin.This may be useful for decreasing thechances of getting bogged down whendriving in heavy snow, slush or muddy con-ditions. See page 287 for more information.

W3001336

Page 112: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 112/352

Instruments and Controls 107

Exhaust/Engine Brake

When operating your tractor bob-tailwithout a trailer or on slippery roads,the engine brake switch must be in the“OFF” position. Failure to follow theseinstructions can result in loss of vehiclecontrol and serious personal injury ordeath may occur.

WARNINGA vehicle speed retardation device (suchas “Jake Brake,” “C-Brake,” “ExhaustBrake,” etc.) is not intended to replacethe service brake system on your vehiclenor intended to bring your vehicle to astop . A vehicle speed retardation deviceis only intended to retard the speed of your vehicle under certain conditions.

NOTE! It is normal for there to be a slightdelay in the application of a vehicle speed

retardation device. When using a device of this type, be sure to think ahead and ana-lyze conditions in order to use the deviceproperly.

Page 113: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 113/352

108 Instruments and Controls

Several types of engine brakes can be in-stalled or are standard on certain engines.All are used to reduce wear on the vehiclebrake linings.

Exhaust Brake, Volvo Engine

The exhaust brake is standard equipment onthe Volvo engine. It provides braking effectto the rear wheels by trapping the exhaustin the engine. The switch for exhaust brakehas two positions: ON and OFF.

The exhaust brake is most effective at highengine speed (1,500 to 2,300 r/min). Forproper operation, see page 289.

W3001324

Engine Brake, Volvo Engine — Optional

The Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) is a com-pression brake. It works together with theexhaust brake to provide two levels of braking power. The switch has three posi-tions: OFF, LOW and HIGH. With theswitch in position LOW, only the exhaustbrake is engaged. With the switch in posi-tion HIGH, both the exhaust brake andcompression brake are activated. For properoperation, see page 290.

W3002303

Jake Brake or C–Brake — Optional

These engine brakes are similar in opera-tion and are compression brakes. Threepower levels are available by engaging 2, 4,or 6 cylinders in the braking (for CumminsM11, only two power levels are available).

The left of the two switches is the ON/OFFswitch. The right switch is for selecting theamount of braking power with positionsLOW, MED. and HIGH (for CumminsM11, only LOW and HIGH). For properoperation, see page 291.

W3002303

Page 114: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 114/352

Instruments and Controls 109

Heated Mirror Switch (option)The vehicle can be equipped with heatedmirrors. The switch turns on an electricheater element that is a part of the mirrorglass. The heater is self regulating and willkeep a steady temperature after reachingoperating temperature. Both top and bottommirrors are heated.

Turning the switch on activates a telltale inthe instrument cluster. The telltale will stayon until the switch is turned off.

W3003492

Page 115: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 115/352

110 Instruments and Controls

Pneumatic Switch ClusterThe pneumatic switch cluster can have upto four optional equipment switches. Theyregulate air ow directly to the following

equipment: Differential Lock-Wheel andInteraxle, Air Suspension Level and FifthWheel Slide.

To prevent accidental engagement, eachswitch has a latch that needs to be presseddown before the switch can be operated.

W3002003

Differential Locks (option)There are differential locks available foreach driving axle (4x2 or 6x4) or betweenaxles on a 6x4. The differential lock elimi-nates one-wheel spin-out on slipperysurfaces and improves traction. Each switchhas a safety latch to prevent accidental en-gagement. When the lock is engaged, atelltale lights up in the instrument cluster.

A differential lock should only be used ona slippery surface and not when driving ongood road conditions. If a differential lock telltale is activated in the instrument clus-ter, do not make turns until the telltale hasgone out. See page 311 for information onhow to properly engage and drive with dif-ferential locks engaged.

W3001991

Left: Wheel diff. lock Right: Inter-axle diff. lock

W3000904

Telltales

Page 116: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 116/352

Instruments and Controls 111

Suspension Level

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven withthe air springs deated. Damage to airsuspension parts will occur if springs arenot inated properly.

Tractors with rear air suspension have acontrol for deating the air springs. Use thiswhen uncoupling from trailers. See page329 for correct operation when uncoupling.

The switch has a safety latch to prevent ac-

cidental engagement. Depress the latch andpress in the bottom part of the switch todeate the air springs. A telltale in the in-strument cluster will light up when theswitch is in the “on” position.

W3001341

Sliding Fifth Wheel

The release must never be operatedwhile the vehicle is operating on theroad. Fifth wheel position adjustmentmust only be done when stationary.Damage to the fth wheel, trailer king-pin and slider may occur if not operatedproperly and may lead to an accident,causing serious personal injury or death.

Tractors with a sliding fth wheel mount-ing have an air operated release as standardequipment. The sliding fth wheel is usedfor distributing loads more favorably be-tween the front and rear axles to complywith varying state and provincial laws. Seepage 333 for correct operation.

Depress the latch and press in the bottompart of the switch to release the slider locks.

W3001346

Page 117: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 117/352

112 Instruments and Controls

Optional Switch ClusterThe optional switch cluster can either beused for additional switches when the otherclusters are used up or can be removed tohouse more radio equipment. The openingis a standard DIN radio slot.

W3000973

Generic switches are available for auxiliaryfunctions that are installed by the customer.These should be located in the optionalswitch cluster and can be purchased fromyour local Volvo Truck dealer.

W3002419

The optional switch panel can be removedand a radio or a Volvo Road Relay can beinstalled.

W3002420

Page 118: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 118/352

Instruments and Controls 113

Miscellaneous SwitchesHorn SwitchesElectric and air horns are standard equip-ment. They are both operated from thesteering wheel. The air horn button (1) islocated in the middle of the steering wheel.If the vehicle is equipped with an airbag(SRS), the airbag module can be presseddown anywhere around the edge to engagethe air horn.

There are two buttons for the electric cityhorn (2) located on the steering wheelspokes.

W8000947

Instrument Light Dimmer SwitchThe switch is a rheostat that controls theinstrument light. Instrument light isactivated by the headlight switch. Light in-tensity can be varied from off to fullbrightness by turning the rheostat clockwiseor counterclockwise.

W3000956

Cigar LighterTo operate the cigar lighter, press in thecenter until it stays in. The heater elementwill heat up and pop the lighter out when itis ready for use.

The ash tray is located next to the cigarlighter.

W3000959

Page 119: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 119/352

114 Graphic Display

Graphic Display Overview

T3010426

The display in the bottom left-hand cornerof the instrument cluster presents opera-tional information to the driver. The display

menus and functions are selected with thecontrols on the right-hand side of the steer-ing wheel. Certain information will beshown automatically (e.g. warning mes-sages that need immediate attention).

The display has a large number of mainmenus and sub-menus used for selectingthe correct functions. This section describeseach function: how the display functionsare accessed with the controls on the wind-

shield wiper lever and which actions arerequired by the driver when messages areautomatically shown in the display.

The information which is accessible varies,depending on whether the truck is in adriving or non-driving mode. Certain func-

tions are protected by a password and arenot shown until the correct password hasbeen entered. Password protected functionsare described in Service Manual“ Instrumentation, VN, from 3/99 and VHD ”(see page 341 for order information).

In order to control a specic function it isimportant to know which menu you areworking in. When a function is describedin this section, the information contains themenu name. For example:

”MENU:” Set-Up Mode, Language.

Page 120: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 120/352

Graphic Display 115

Graphic Display Controls

If the vehicle is in motion, use the dis-play controls carefully. Do not lose roadconcentration. Be familiar with operationof the controls. Shifting concentration tooperating the controls can lead to losingcontrol of the vehicle and may result inserious personal injury or death.

The controls for the graphic display are lo-

cated on the windshield wiper lever on theright-hand side of the steering wheel. Thefollowing commands are available:

1 “Esc” is used to return to the previousmenu and cancel a setting/operation.

2 “Select” conrms a highlighted selec-tion of a menu or character.

3 “Up arrow” moves the cursor up. Usedwhen setting numerical values.

4 “Down arrow” moves the cursor down.Used when setting numerical values.

T3008810

Selecting a Menu1 Using the up/down buttons the cursor

is moved to the particular menu,which is then highlighted. A down ar-row in the lower right-hand cornershows whether there are any moremenus available. If this is the case,

you can continue to step down throughthe list (see the adjacent example).

2 Pressing SELECT conrms the choice.

3 Pressing Esc exits the chosen menu.By pressing Esc repeatedly, the cursoris moved successively back to themain menus.

Set-up mode

System diagnostic

Data log mode

Password Input #

Page 121: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 121/352

116 Graphic Display

Changing Settings1 The up/down buttons increase or re-

duce the set values (e.g. hours andminutes in the adjacent example).

2 Pressing SELECT conrms the choice.

3 If there are several settings to changein the same menu, the cursor is movedto the next setting using the up/downbuttons (e.g. the selection betweenON, OFF and SET in the adjacent ex-ample).

4 Esc moves the highlight to the previ-

ous number or selection, if there areany, otherwise the setting is cancelled.

ALARM 08:20

CLOCK 08:00ON OFF SET

Display MenusThere are a number of main menus, eachwith sub-menus, that lists functions avail-able. There are two types of menus: Thosethat are available when the vehicle is inmotion and those that can only be accessedwhen stationary. Several non-driving sub-menus are only accessible with a password.

The password-protected menus are not cov-ered in this manual (see page 158).

While the vehicle is stationary, there are 4menus in addition to the 4 drive menus.Also, the menu TIME/DISTANCE has oneadditional function while the vehicle isstationary.

Non-Driving Mode Menus

• Set-Up Mode(see page 132)

• System Diagnostic

(see page 137)

• Data Log Mode(see page 152)

• Password Input(see page 158)

Driving Mode Menus

• GAUGE(see page 159)

• FUEL ECONOMY (option)(see page 163)

• TIME/DIST(see page 165)

• FAULTS?(see page 170)

Page 122: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 122/352

Graphic Display 117

Graphic Display Telltales

W3003534

1 Voltmeter ( page 162)2 Engine oil temperature ( page 159)3 Transmission oil temperature

( page 125)4 Preheating active ( page 78)5 Acknowledged warning ( page 130)6 Alarm clock on ( page 167)7 PTO engaged ( page 101)8 Cruise control engaged ( page 265)9 Airbag (SRS) ( page 63)

10 Coolant level ( page 126)11 Washer uid level ( page 120)12 Engine airlter clogged ( page 121)13 Too cold for engine brake ( page 289)14 Overheating, instrument cluster

( page 120)15 Engine preheat fault ( page 249)16 Engine oil pressure ( page 76)17 Coolant temperature ( page 75)

Page 123: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 123/352

118 Graphic Display

Information and Stop MessagesThe information and stop messages work together with the 1 INFO or 1 STOP tell-tales below the Graphic Display. If theengine is running, the buzzer will sound atany time the 1 STOP telltale comes on.

Information TelltaleNOTE! When the yellow 1 INFO telltalelights up, the indicated fault should bechecked at the next stop.

See page 119 for a listing of other telltalesthat are linked to the 1 INFO telltale.

T3008860

Stop Telltale

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimately

result in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

See page 126 for a listing of other telltalesthat are linked to the 1 STOP telltale.

T3008861

More than one message can be active at thesame time. When a new message is acti-vated, the new one is shown instead of theold. A downward pointing arrow in theright-hand corner of the display means thatseveral messages are active.

Page 124: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 124/352

Graphic Display 119

Information TelltaleGeneralThe yellow 1 INFO telltale lights up whenan abnormal status is detected by an elec-tronic control unit. A telltale or text, orboth, are shown in the display in additionto the 1 INFO telltale. For certain telltales,a reference value is also shown.

The telltales are described starting on page120, text messages are described starting onpage 123 and combined telltale and textmessages are described starting on page125.

Important! When this telltale lights up, theindicated fault should be checked at thenext stop.

T3008860

Information messages can be put onstandby if other information needs to be ac-cessed on the display. See page 130 forinformation on how to acknowledge mes-sages and how to recall messages.

Page 125: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 125/352

120 Graphic Display

TelltalesThe yellow 1 INFO lights up and a telltaleis shown in the graphic display, describingin what component the problem has

occurred:

AirbagThe airbag (SRS) is described on page 63.

CAUTIONThe vehicle should be taken to an autho-rized Volvo Truck dealer immediately if the SRS telltale stays on or lights upwhen the vehicle is being driven.

T3008842

Instrument Cluster OverheatingThe symbol is shown when the temperature

behind the instrument cluster is too high.The instrument lighting becomes weakerand the indicators on the instrument show aminimal reading. Lower the heat in thecab! When the heat is reduced, the instru-ment functions will gradually be restored.

NOTE! If the temperature is too high overa prolonged period, the instrument clustercan be damaged.

T3008840

Washer Fluid LevelThe telltale lights when the washer uid islow.

T3008838

Page 126: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 126/352

Graphic Display 121

Air Filter Blocked (option)When the telltale lights, the engine air lteris blocked. A blocked lter will causehigher fuel consumption and black smoke.To replace air lter, see the Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and Engine .

T3008843

Too Cold for Engine Brake (Volvo Engine Only)Position 2 of the engine brake should notbe switched on until the engine has become

warm (over 110

F [45

C]). If position 2 isselected and the engine is too cold, thissymbol will be shown (however, VEB isnot activated).

T3009355

Fault in PreheatingSee page 249 for more information on theVolvo engine preheater.

T3008841

Page 127: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 127/352

122 Graphic Display

Transmission Oil TemperatureThis telltale lights when the transmissionoil temperature is too high. It is shown witha text information about the temperature.See page 125 for more information. T3008831

Charging SystemThis telltale lights when there is a problemin the charging system. It is shown withtext information of the charging system sta-tus. The voltage is shown together with themessage TOO HIGH. See page 162 formore information.

T3008832

Engine Oil TemperatureThis telltale lights if the engine oil temper-ature becomes too high. It is shown withthe text TOO HIGH. The engine power isderated. The temperature limit for activa-tion varies for different engines. See page159 for more information.

T3008830

Page 128: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 128/352

Graphic Display 123

TextThe yellow 1 INFO telltale lights up andinformation text is shown on the display.

The text contains information on where thefault has occurred as well as the type of fault (applies to the data link):

Factory installed equipment:

CHECKENGINE

NEXT STOP

T3008860

Specic data link fault:

CHECKENGINE

DATA LINK

T3008860

Page 129: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 129/352

124 Graphic Display

Data link broken:

CHECK

DATA LINKBROKEN

T3008860

Not factory installed equipment:

The following can be shown if equipmenthas been added by a customer and con-nected to the data link:

MID (Message IDentier) = controller

To nd more information on the data link diagnostic function, see page 137.

CHECK

ERROR IN

MID 142

T3008860

Page 130: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 130/352

Graphic Display 125

Telltale + TextThe yellow 1 INFO telltale lights up andinformation text together with a value isshown on the display. The text contains in-

formation on where the fault has occurredand the value will show how much above orbelow the limit the current conditions are:

Transmission Oil TemperatureIf the transmission oil temperature becomestoo high, the 1 INFO telltale lights upautomatically with the text HIGH. This tell-tale and text will come on when the oiltemperature has been 210 F (100 C) orabove for 30 minutes or 250

F (120

C) orabove for 10 minutes.

NOTE! If the temperature goes over 285 F(140 C), a STOP message will be gener-ated, see page 129.

T3008831

HIGH

225

F

T3008860

VoltmeterThe voltmeter value, including the textTOO HIGH, is automatically shown if thecharging system voltage becomes too high.

T3008832 TOO HIGH17 V

T3008860

Page 131: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 131/352

126 Graphic Display

Stop TelltaleIn the event of a serious fault, the red1 STOP telltale lights up and the buzzersounds (if the engine is on). In addition to

the 1 STOP telltale, a symbol or text, orboth, are shown in the display. A referencevalue is also shown for certain telltales.

T3008861

TelltalesCoolant Level

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehicle

crash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

The telltale is shown if the coolant level istoo low. During check Pre–trip (option) atext message is shown if the level is toolow.

T3008851

Page 132: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 132/352

Graphic Display 127

Engine Oil Pressure

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

Shown when the engine oil pressure is too

low. The LED in the gauge lights up to-gether with the telltale and the buzzer alsosounds. Depending on the engine manufac-turer’s program in the ECU, the trip pointmay differ slightly for different engines.

W3003613

T3008861

Coolant Temperature

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

The symbol is shown when the coolanttemperature is too high.

W3003614

T3008861

Page 133: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 133/352

128 Graphic Display

TextThe red 1 STOP telltale lights up and in-formation text ashes on the display. Thebuzzer sounds if the engine is running. The

text includes information about where thefault has occurred:

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

Specic data link fault:

STOP!

DATA LINK

BRAKES

Factory tted equipment:

STOP!

ENGINE

FAILURE

Not factory tted equipment:The following is shown if the customer hastted equipment which is connected to thedata link:

MID (Message IDentier) = controller.

To nd more information on the data link diagnostic function, see page 137.

STOP!

FAILURE IN

MID 142

Page 134: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 134/352

Graphic Display 129

Telltale + TextThe red 1 STOP telltale lights up and in-formation text together with a value is

shown on the display. The text contains in-formation on where the fault has occurredand the value will show how much above orbelow the limit the current conditions are:

Warning, temperature transmission oil

If the temperature of the transmission oilbecomes too high, the red 1 STOP telltaleis shown automatically with the text TOOHIGH. This warning will come on whenthe oil temperature has been 285 F (140 C)or above for over 30 seconds.

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on, can ultimatelyresult in automatic engine shutdown and

loss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

T3008831 TOO HIGH285 F

T3008861

Page 135: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 135/352

130 Graphic Display

Acknowledge Information and Stop Messages

By pressing Esc, the display with the faultmessage is reset and the graphic display re-

turns to the same status as before the erroroccurred. An acknowledged fault messageis shown as a symbol on the right in thegraphic display window. All types of faultmessages can be acknowledged. Acknowl-edged but active messages are shown againwhen the ignition key is turned to the startposition.

T3008852

Yellow 1 INFO telltale : The text message,

yellow 1 INFO telltale and the symbol canbe acknowledged using Esc. This warningis acknowledged until the next time the ig-nition key is turned to the start position.

Exceptions: The message can be shownagain if the fault is de-activated and thenbecomes active again.

Example: If the engine oil temperature be-comes too high a message is activated

automatically. The driver acknowledges thismessage using Esc. If the temperature thendrops to a normal level but then becomestoo high again the warning is activatedagain.

T3008860

Red 1 STOP telltale : The buzzer, textmessage and the symbol can be acknowl-edged using Esc, but are active again 10seconds after pressing the button. The red1 STOP telltale remains lit the whole time.

T3008861

Page 136: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 136/352

Graphic Display 131

RecallAn acknowledged fault message can be re-called, i.e. be shown on the graphic displayagain.

MENU: FAULTS?

1 SELECT conrms the choice of themenu FAULTS? The last acknowl-edged fault message is shown. If thereis more than one message, a down ar-row is shown in the right-hand corner.

2 The up/down buttons move the cursorbetween the current messages.

If an acknowledged fault message is still ac-tive at the next occasion the ignition key isturned to the ON position this is shown asa non-acknowledged message. NO FAULTSis shown if there are no fault messages.

Page 137: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 137/352

132 Graphic Display

Main Menu: Set-Up ModeThe menu Set-up mode has 14 sub-menuswhere 6 are not protected by passwords and8 are protected by passwords.

• Language• Mi/ F/USgal or km/ C• Clock format• Contrast• Backlight• Night display

Password is required:(see page 158)

• Default language• Fleet limit: r/min• Fleet limit: speed• Fleet fuel target• Odometer setting• Fleet ID• Password cong.

LanguageMENU: Set-up mode, Language

This setting of language applies only untilthe ignition key switch is turned off. Tochange the language permanently, a pass-word is required (see page 116).

1 To set the desired language, press SE-LECT when you are in the menuSet-up mode, Language .

2 On the graphic display up to three dif-ferent languages will now be shown.Select the desired language by movingthe cursor to the particular row. Con-rm the choice with SELECT.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

English

Spanish

French

Page 138: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 138/352

Graphic Display 133

Miles/

F/USgal or km/

CMENU: Set-up mode, Mi/ F/USgal orkm/ C

NOTE! If Miles and Fahrenheit are chosen,the fuel consumption is shown in US gal-lons. If kilometers and Celsius are chosen,the consumption is shown in liters.

1 Select the menu Set-up mode,Mi/ F/USgal or km/ C and the fol-lowing diagram is shown on thegraphic display (with the particular

setting highlighted):The up/down buttons move the cursorbetween the alternatives.

2 Conrm the choice with SELECT.

3 When km and C are chosen, thefollowing is shown on the graphic dis-play (with the particular settinghighlighted):

The up/down buttons move the cursorbetween the alternatives.

4 Conrm the choice with SELECT.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

km and C

Mi/USgal and F

Selectfuel data unitkm/l l/100

km

Page 139: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 139/352

134 Graphic Display

Clock formatMENU: Set-up mode, Clock format

1 Select the menu Set-up mode, Clockformat and the following diagram isshown on the graphic display (with theparticular setting highlighted):

2 The up/down buttons move the cursorbetween the alternatives. Conrm thechoice with SELECT.AM/PM is the 12 hour display (AM =morning and PM = evening).

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

AM/PM

24 h

ContrastMENU: Set-up mode, Contrast

1 Select the menu Contrast and the fol-lowing diagram is shown on thegraphic display. The bar shows theparticular setting in relation tomax/min. contrast:

The up arrow increases the contrast.

The down arrow reduces the contrast.

2 Conrm the choice with SELECT.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

Adjust contrast

Page 140: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 140/352

Graphic Display 135

BacklightMENU: Set-up mode, Backlight

NOTE! This setting affects the displaybrightness when the headlights or parkinglights are on. When the exterior lights areoff, the brightness on the display is con-stant.

The graphic display brightness is controlledby the dimmer rheostat setting (which alsocontrols the other instrument cluster light-ing). In this menu, the display lighting canbe altered in relation to the other instru-ment cluster lighting.

1 Select the menu Backlight and thefollowing diagram is shown on thegraphic display. The bar shows theparticular setting in relation tomax/min. lighting:

the up arrow button increases thebackground lighting.

the down arrow button reduces thebackground lighting.

2 Conrm the choice with SELECT.

1 = off.

2 = parking lamps.

3 = high and low beam.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

Adjust lighting

Page 141: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 141/352

136 Graphic Display

Night displayMENU: Set-up mode, Night display

1 Select the menu Night display and thefollowing diagram is shown on thedisplay:

2 With the up/down buttons the settingswitches between Normal and Re-verse . With the setting Normal the textis dark and the background light. Thesetting Reverse makes the text lightand the background dark. This settingonly applies when the headlights orparking lights are on.

3 Conrm the choice with SELECT.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

Night display

Normal

Reverse

Page 142: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 142/352

Graphic Display 137

Main Menu: System DiagnosticThe menu System diagnostic has 3 sub-menus which are not protected by apassword, and 1 sub-menu which is pro-

tected by a password.

• Fault diagnostic

• Cluster self test

• Part number

Password required:

(see page 158)

• Status test

Fault DiagnosticMENU: Diagnostic, Fault diagnostic

A list of the vehicle’s ECUs is shown inthe menu Fault diagnostic . Each ECU isidentied by a MID number (MessageIDentier). In addition a menu for resettingall the fault codes is shown.

For a list of common fault codes, see page143.

• ABS Brakes, MID 136• Instrument cluster center module,

MID 140• Info Display (instrument cluster

graphic display), MID 234• SRS Airbag, MID 232• Cab controller (Vehicle ECU),

MID 144• Engine, MID 128• Non specied system• Reset all (password)

Page 143: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 143/352

138 Graphic Display

1 The up/down buttons are used tomove the cursor in the list.

2 SELECT conrms the selection of ECU or Reset all .

3 During the time that each respectiveECU is being called, the displayshows the text:

Data transfer

in progress

please wait

4 No faults in the chosen system:

Press Esc to return to the previousmenu. No errors

5 Not responding to Non spec. system :

Press Esc to return to the previousmenu.

Non spec. syst

MID (127)Not responding

6 If the chosen system does not respondwithin 5 seconds the following mes-sage is shown (in this example theengine has been called):

Engine

MID 128

Not responding

Page 144: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 144/352

Graphic Display 139

Fault codes are shown1 If there is a fault code or codes the

following is shown, for example:

Line 1: Identication of ECU

Line 2: Identication of parame-ter/component

Line 3: Fault type identication

”6 1” shows how many times the fault hasbeen registered since the last resetting. If

no information is available for how manytimes the fault code has been registered,only Active is shown (the fault remains). Oralternatively Inactive is shown (the faultwas there previously).

The arrow in the lower, right-hand corner isshown if there is more than one fault code.The up/down buttons move the cursor andthe next fault code/message is shown. To

reset codes, a password must be entered(see page 158).

Engine

Coolant temperature

Value too high

Active 6 1 I #

2 If more than 20 fault codes/messagesare available for the chosen ECU the21st message will be:

To see those messages that are notshown, earlier messages must be reset(see above). The fault codes are pre-

sented in text format, but the user canalso choose to have the fault codespresented numerically (if a fault codeor ECU is not recognized by the sys-tem, they will only be presented innumeric format).

Engine

Too many

error messages

Page 145: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 145/352

140 Graphic Display

Numeric or text1 Press SELECT when there are fault

codes and the following menu isshown. Select numeric or text format(the function Reset will only be shownwhen the correct password has beenentered; see page 158):

Numeric

Text

Time stamp

Reset

2 When Text has been selected, the faultcodes are shown according to step no.1, page 139.

3 When Numeric has been selected thefault codes are shown with numbers:

MID: Identication of ECU

PID: Identication of parameter

PPID: Volvo unique identicationof parameter

SID: Identication of component

PSID: Volvo unique identicationof component

FMI: Identication of fault type

MID 128

PID 110

FMI 0

Active 6 1 I #

”6

1” shows how many times the faultoccurred since the last resetting. If there is no information available forhow many times the fault code hasbeen active, only Active is shown (thefault remains) or Inactive (the faultwas there previously).

Page 146: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 146/352

Graphic Display 141

The arrow in the lower, right-handcorner is shown if there is more thanone fault code. The up/down buttonsmove the cursor and the next faultcode is shown. If the correct passwordhas been entered, resetting can bedone in Reset all , last in the list. Thisresetting deletes only the fault codesfor the chosen ECU.

4 If more than 20 fault codes/messagesare available for the chosen ECU, the21st message will be:

To see those messages that are notshown, earlier messages must be reset(password restricted, see page 158).

Too manyerror messages

Page 147: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 147/352

142 Graphic Display

Time stamp1 To show the time when the fault code

was set for the rst and latest occasionrespectively, press SELECT when theparticular fault code is presented (doesnot apply to ABS brakes or SRSairbag). The following menu is shown:

Numeric

Text

Time stamp

Reset

2 Select Time stamp and the followingtext message is shown: Data transfer

in progress

please wait

3 The following is shown (time stamp ispresented as the number of hours theengine has been running):

Press Esc to return to the previousmenu.

First

X

Last

X

4 If the transfer should fail, the follow-ing message is shown: First

No data

Last

No data

Page 148: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 148/352

Graphic Display 143

Common Fault Codes

MID Messages Supported (with text)

MID

code

Description

128 Engine

130 Transmission

136 ABS

140 Instrument

144 Cab Controller

232 SRS (Airbag)

Additional MID Messages (withouttext)

137 Brakes, Trailer #1

138 Brakes, Trailer #2

138 Brakes, Trailer #3

141 Trip Recorder

162 Vehicle Navigation Unit

166 Tires, Power Unit171 Driver Information Center

172 Off-board Diagnostics #1

179 Data Logging Computer

181 Communication Unit - Satellite

191 Vehicle Location Unit

231 Communications Unit - Satel-

lite/GPS/Cellular

SRSSID

Description

1 Driver Airbag Ign. Loop

PIDcode

Description

62 Retarder inh status71 Idle shutdown status

84 Road speed

91 % Throttle pedal

100 Engine oil pressure

102 Boost pressure

105 Air inlet temperature

106 Air inlet pressure108 Barometric pressure

110 Engine coolant temperature

111 Coolant level

127 Transmission oil psi

160 Main shaft speed

161 Input shaft speed

175 Engine oil temperature

177 Transmission oil temperature

190 Engine speed

191 Transm. output RPM

PSID (Proprietary Subsystem ID)

PSIDCode

Description

PSID 1 Retarder Brake Control SetSwitch

PSID 2 Idle Validation Switch #2

PSID 3 Idle Validation Switch #3

PSID 4 Retarder Brake Control Switch

Page 149: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 149/352

144 Graphic Display

CommonSID code

Description

233 Controller #2

236 Power contact device237 Start enable solenoid

242 CC resume switch

243 CC set switch

244 CC enable switch

245 Clutch pedal switch

246 Brake pedal switch #1

247 Brake pedal switch #2

248 Proprietary data link

249 SAE J1922 data link

250 SAE J1708 data link

251 Power supply

252 Calibration module

253 Calibration memory

254 Controller #1

EngineSID code

Description

1 Injector #1

2 Injector #2

3 Injector #3

4 Injector #45 Injector #5

6 Injector #6

21 Engine position sensor

22 Timing sensor

25 Ext. engine protection sig.

Transm.SID code

Description

1 C1 solenoid valve

2 C2 solenoid valve3 C3 solenoid valve

4 C4 solenoid valve

5 C5 solenoid valve

6 C6 solenoid valve

7 Lockup solenoid valve

16 Neutral start output

18 Shift selector #1

27 Lockup clutch PSI sw.

28 Forward range PSI sw.

29 Neutral range PSI sw.

30 Reverse range PSI sw.

Vehicle

Naviga-tion SID

code

Description

1 Dead reckoning

2 LORAN receiver

3 Global positioning system(GPS)

4 Integrated navigation unit

Page 150: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 150/352

Graphic Display 145

BrakeSID code

Description

1 ABS snsr axle 1 L

2 ABS snsr axle 1 R3 ABS snsr axle 2 L

4 ABS snsr axle 2 R

5 ABS snsr axle 3 L

6 ABS snsr axle 3 R

7 ABS valve axle 1 L

8 ABS valve axle 1 R

9 ABS valve axle 2 L

10 ABS valve axle 2 R

11 ABS valve axle 3 L

12 ABS valve axle 3 R

13 ABS rtrdr ctrl relay

14 ABS relay, diagonal 1

15 ABS relay, diagonal 2

18 ABS, dif 1 - ASR valve

19 ABS, dif 2 - ASR valve

22 Speed signal input

23 Warning light bulb

24 ASR light bulb

FMIcode

Description

0 Data valid, but high

1 Data valid, but low2 Data erratic

3 Voltage shorted high

4 Voltage shorted low

5 Current low or open C

6 Current high or short C

7 Mech syst no respons

8 Abnormal freq or PW

9 Abnormal update rate

10 Abnormal change rate

11 Failure unknown

12 Bad device

13 Out of calibration

14 Special instruction 1

1 This is displayed when the airbag has storedcrash data or by the data concentrator when theengine shutdown output has been activated.

Page 151: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 151/352

146 Graphic Display

PPID (Proprietary Parameter ID)

PPIDCode

Description

69 Buffered Idle Switch70 Pedal Switches, Supply

71 Cruise Control and Retarder,Supply Switch

72 Accelerator Pedal and Retarder,Supply Sensors

73 Accelerator Control 2 and Pri-mary Tank, Supply Sensors

75 Range Inhibitor, Status Sole-noid Valve

76 Brake Lamps, Status Relay

77 Compressor, Status SolenoidValve

78 Interval Wiper, Status Relay

79 Area Inhibitor, Status SolenoidValve

86 Engine Brake Torque Percent

109 EPG3 Drive Stage Failure

121 MTE (Engine CompressorControl Output) Failure

122 VCB Engine CompressionBrake

123 EPG2 Start and Warmhold

124 EPG1 Engine Brake125 EOL Enable Failure

195 Proprietary Diagnostic DataRequest/Clear Count

196 Proprietary DiagnosticData/Count Clear Response

Page 152: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 152/352

Graphic Display 147

Cluster Self TestMENU: System diagnostics, cluster self test

Four sub-menus are available:

• Bulb test

• Gauge test

• Display test

• Buzzer test

Cancel TestPress Esc in order to cancel the test.

Bulb TestMENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self test, Bulb test

1 Select Bulb test .

2 The telltale lamps light up for approx.5 seconds.

3 Esc cancels the test and the menuBulb test is shown again.

Changing BulbsChanging the instrument cluster’s telltalebulbs can be carried out from the rear side,

without the instrument cluster needing tobe opened. See page 95 for replacementinformation.

Page 153: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 153/352

148 Graphic Display

Gauge testMENU: System diagnostics, Cluster self test, Gauge test

1 Select Gauge test .

2 The pointers move back and forth afew times, between the end positions.They stop at the mid-point of thegauge before the test is complete, thenreturn to zero. This is only a check that they can move (i.e. that the gaugefunctions).

3 Esc cancels the test and the menuGauge test is shown again.

Display testMENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self test, Display test

1 Select Display test .

2 The display goes out, lights up, goesout. In the odometer display, all seg-ments are shown, then off, back on, off again, and back to the normal display.

3 Esc cancels the test and the menu Dis-play test is shown again.

Page 154: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 154/352

Graphic Display 149

Buzzer testMENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self test, Buzzer test

1 Select Buzzer test .

2 On the display, the name of the cur-rent sound is shown at the same timeas the sound is activated. With theup/down buttons you can switch be-tween the different sounds.Three different sounds (asher indica-tor, reminder and caution) are testedfor 10 seconds.

The caution sound is connected to the red1 STOP telltale.

3 Esc cancels the test and the menuBuzzer test is shown again.

Page 155: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 155/352

150 Graphic Display

Part numberMENU: System diagnostics, Part number

A list of the vehicle’s electronic controlunits (ECUs) is shown in the menu Partnumber . Each ECU is identied by a MIDnumber (Message IDentier).

• ABS Brakes, MID 136• Instrument cluster center module, MID

140• Display, MID 234• SRS Airbag, MID 232• Vehicle ECU, MID 144• Engine, MID 128

1 The up/down buttons are used tomove the cursor in the list.

2 SELECT conrms the selection of anECU.

3 In the meantime, the display shows thetext: Data transfer

in progressplease wait

4 The following text is presented:

SW: The software part numberMID 128 SW ID

03163028P01

Page 156: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 156/352

Graphic Display 151

5 The up/down buttons are used tomove the cursor in the list.

HW: ECU part number

MID 128 HW ID

VOLVO08192949P06

6 If there is a communication error, thefollowing is shown No data (this ex-ample shows HW ID, but same textapplies to SW ID except that HW isreplaced by SW):

MID 128 HW ID

No data

Page 157: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 157/352

152 Graphic Display

Main Menu: Data Log Mode (Volvo Engine Only)Menu Data log mode has 4 sub-menuswhere 3 are not protected by passwords and1 is protected by a password.

• Vehicle ID

• Totals

• Trip data

Password required:(see page 158)

• Reset trip data

Vehicle IDMENU: Data log mode, Vehicle ID

1 Select the menu Data log mode, Vehi-cle ID and the following text messageis shown:

Data transfer

in progress

please wait

2 The eet ID that is shown has beenentered in the menu.

Press Esc to return to the previousmenu.

Fleet ID:XXX

Chassis no:

XXX

3 If the transfer should fail, the follow-ing message is shown:

Operationfailed

Page 158: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 158/352

Graphic Display 153

TotalsMENU: Data log mode, Totals

1 Select the menu Data log mode, To-tals .

2 The menus that show Totals can bescrolled to using the up/down but-tons. Total distance

406.7 mi

NOTE! If km and C has been selected, theconsumption is shown in liters.

Total fuel used

51.3 gal

Total enginehours

7.3 h

Total idletime0.3 h

Page 159: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 159/352

154 Graphic Display

Total PTOhours0.5 h

Total engine revolutions

1 220 100 r

3 If the transfer should fail, the follow-ing message is shown:

Cancel operationPress Esc in order to cancel the operation.

Operation

failed

Page 160: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 160/352

Graphic Display 155

Trip data (Volvo engine only)MENU: Data log mode, Trip data

1 Select the menu Data log mode, Trip .

2 The information below can be scrolledto using the up/down buttons.

Trip distance

203.5 mi

NOTE! If Miles and F has been se-lected, the consumption is shown inUS gallons.

Trip fuel

Avg. 28 l/100 km

Acc. 57.0 gal

Trip overrevs

0.8 h

Trip uneconomy rev’s

0.4 h

Page 161: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 161/352

156 Graphic Display

NOTE! If km and C has been se-lected, the consumption is shown inliters.

Trip fuel

uneconomy rev’s

8.5 galTrip average speed

67.4 km/h

Trip overspeed

0.2 h

Trip engine hours

3.0 h

Trip idle time

0.4 hNOTE! If km and C has been se-lected, the consumption is shown inliters.

Trip idle fuel

2.5 gal

Trip PTO hours

1.3 h

Page 162: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 162/352

Graphic Display 157

NOTE! If km and C has been se-lected, the consumption is shown inliters.

Trip PTO fuel

20.4 gal

Trip cruise

2.5 h

4 If the transfer should fail, the follow-ing message is shown:

Cancel operationPress Esc in order to cancel the operation.

Operationfailed

Page 163: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 163/352

158 Graphic Display

Main Menu: Password InputCertain functions are password protectedand there are two password levels for thedisplay (it is also possible to select not toprotect functions with password, which canbe done by a Volvo Truck dealer):

1 Workshop password

2 Owner password

The two passwords give the user access toall password protected functions, with oneexception:

The workshop password does not give ac-cess to the password conguration, i.e. it isnot possible to change the Owner passwordor the Workshop password with it.

The following menus are protected by pass-word:

• Default language• Fleet limit: r/min• Fleet limit: speed

• Fleet fuel target• Amperemeter calibration• Fleet ID• Reset (applicable for several functions)• Status test• Password cong.

When the start key has been in stop posi-tion for more than 60 seconds, or if thebatteries have been disconnected, the pass-word must be entered again.

The password protected menus are de-scribed in the Service Manual “ Instrument,VN, 2/99 .” Order information can be foundon page 341.

Page 164: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 164/352

Graphic Display 159

Main Menu: GaugeWhen the menu GAUGE has been se-lected, you switch between the varioussub-menus with the up/down buttons.

• TEMPERATURE, ENGINE OIL• TEMPERATURE, TRANSMISSION

OIL (Option)• VOLTMETER

Temperature, engine oilMENU: GAUGE, TEMPERATURE EN-GINE OIL

The engine oil temperature is shown as inthe diagram.

If the sensor data for Temperature, engineoil is not available, the symbol is shown aswell as the text NO DATA.

T3008830

185 F

T3008830

NODATA

Information messageYellow 1 INFO telltale

If the engine oil temperature becomes too

high, an information message is shown au-tomatically with the text HIGH. At thesame time the yellow 1 INFO telltale un-der the display lights up. Esc acknowledgesthe info message.

T3008830 HIGH210 F

T3008860

Page 165: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 165/352

160 Graphic Display

Temperature, transmission oil (option)

MENU: GAUGE, TEMPERATURE,

TRANSMISSION OILThe transmission oil temperature is shownas in the diagram.

NOTE! The temperature display startsshowing only at approximately 150 F(65 C).

If the sensor data for Transmission oiltemperature is not available, the symbol isshown as well as the text NO DATA.

T3008831 170 F

T3008831 NODATA

Information messageYellow 1 INFO lamp

If the temperature of the transmission oilbecomes too high, an information messageis shown automatically with the text HIGH.At the same time the yellow 1 INFOtelltale under the display lights up. Esc ac-knowledges the information message.

For HIGH to display with the 1 INFO tell-tale, the transmission oil temperature mustbe 210 F (100 C) for 30 minutes, or 250 F(120 C) for 10 minutes.

T3008831

HIGH250 F

T3008860

Page 166: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 166/352

Graphic Display 161

Stop messageRed 1 STOP telltaleIf the temperature of the transmission oilbecomes too high, a ashing stop messageis shown automatically with the text TOOHIGH. At the same time the red 1 STOPtelltale under the display lights up and thewarning signal sounds. Esc acknowledgesthe stop message.

For TOO HIGH to display with the1 STOP telltale, the transmission oil tem-perature must be 285 F (140 C) for 30seconds.

T3008831 TOO HIGH285 F

T3008861

Page 167: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 167/352

162 Graphic Display

VoltmeterMENU: GAUGE, VOLTMETER

The battery/charging voltage is shown as inthe diagram. If the battery/charging voltagebecomes too low (below 9.5 V), the instru-ment cluster will lose power.

T3008832

13.1 V

Information messageYellow 1 INFO telltale

If the battery/charging voltage becomes toohigh, the voltmeter’s value is shown auto-matically as well as the text TOO HIGH.At the same time the yellow 1 INFO tell-tale under the display lights up.

T3008832 TOO HIGH17.9 V

T3008860

Page 168: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 168/352

Graphic Display 163

Main Menu: Fuel Economy (option)Menu FUEL ECONOMY has 2 sub-menus:

•AVG/INST

• LEG FUEL

FUEL ECONOMY is chosen and then theup/down buttons are used in order tochange between the available sub-menus.

AVG/INST Fuel EconomyMENU: FUEL ECONOMY, AVG/INST

For setting metric or English value dis-plays, see page 132.

The following is shown on the display:

• Average trip fuel consumption (AVG):The value is presented numericallyand as an arrow above the bar. The ar-row’s position shows the value. For ashort time after resetting, the followingis shown “— — — “ instead of theaverage fuel consumption.

• Instantaneous fuel consumption(INST):The value is presented numerically aswell as in the form of a bar.

• Target trip fuel consumption (TAR-GET):The value is presented as an arrow un-der the bar. The arrow’s positionshows the value. This value is pass-

word protected, see page 158.NOTE! When idling, the bar is not shownand the fuel consumption is shown ingal/hour.

NOTE! If km and C have been selectedthe consumption is shown in liters. In theexample above, L/100 km will then beshown instead of mpg.

AVG9.9

#

INST8.0

"

mpg TARGET

Page 169: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 169/352

164 Graphic Display

Reset fuel economy1 Press SELECT in the menu

AVG/INST .

2 A new text message in the form of aquestion is shown:RESET FUEL DATA? Press SELECTto reset.

When the leg’s fuel consumption is reset,the average fuel consumption will also bereset.

RESET

FUEL DATA?PRESS SELECT FOR 1S

Leg FuelMENU: FUEL ECONOMY, LEG FUEL

Press the up/down buttons in the menuAVG/INST to reach the menu LEG FUEL .

The following is shown in the menu LEGFUEL on the display:

• The Leg fuel consumption (amount of fuel used since the last resetting).

• Empty XXX mi (where XXX is thecalculated range using the present in-stantaneous consumption).

NOTE! If km and C have been selected,the consumption is shown in liters. In theexample below, L will then be shown in-stead of USgal.

NOTE! Since the ”calculated range” isbased on the instantaneous consumption,the correct value is rst shown shortly afterstart.

LEG FUELXXX

EMPTY XXX mi

Page 170: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 170/352

Graphic Display 165

Main Menu: Time/DistanceMenu TIME/DIST has 4 sub-menus.

• CLOCK

• ALARM CLOCK

• TRIPMETER

• AVERAGE SPEED

NOTE! Menu TIME/DIST is availableeven when the ignition key is in the off po-sition. It is activated by keeping one of thecontrol buttons on the wiper stalk pressed

down for at least 1 second. The menu re-mains active for 30 seconds after the lastdepressing of the button.

The alarm clock cannot be set while driv-ing, but the buzzer which sounds for thealarm call can be switched off, see page168.

Clock MENU: TIME/DIST, CLOCK

Shows the current time. To set the time for-mat 12h or 24h, see page 134.

Setting1 To set the clock, press SELECT when

you are in the menu

TIME/DISTANCE and the clock function will be shown.

2 Set the hours with the up/downbuttons. Conrm the choice with SE-LECT.

3 Set the rst digit in the minutes withthe up/down buttons. Conrm thechoice with SELECT.

Page 171: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 171/352

166 Graphic Display

4 Set the second digit in the minuteswith the up/down buttons. Conrm thechoice with SELECT.

5 Set the AM/PM (if the time format is12h) with the up/down buttons. Con-rm the choice with SELECT. 12:00

Cancel settingWhen setting hours, Esc cancels the settingand the time is shown according to the pre-vious setting.

Pressing Esc after setting the minutes or af-ter setting the AM/PM, moves the cursorback to the previous selection.

Ignition key in the off positionWhen the ignition key is in the OFF posi-tion, if setting the clock takes more than 30seconds between pushing the buttons, thetime which has been entered then applies.

Page 172: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 172/352

Page 173: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 173/352

168 Graphic Display

Ignition key in the off positionWhen the ignition key is in the OFF posi-tion, if setting the alarm clock takes morethan 30 seconds, the time which has beenentered then applies.

Switch off the alarm clockWhen the alarm clock goes off, the wordALARM ashes, the current time is shownand a warning signal sounds. The alarm isswitched off after 60 seconds or when theup, down, Esc or SELECT control button ispressed.

Activate alarm clock (without changing the time of the alarm call)

1 The cursor is moved with the up/downbuttons to ON.

2 SELECT activates the alarm clock and

the symbol is shown on the graphicdisplay.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

ALARM 08:30 AMT3008833

CLOCK 08:00 AMON OFF SET

De-activate the alarm clock1 The cursor is moved with the up/down

buttons to OFF.

2 SELECT switches off the alarm clock and the symbol disappears from thegraphic display.

Cancel settingPress Esc in order to cancel the setting.

ALARM 08:30 AMCLOCK 08:00 AMON OFF SET

Page 174: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 174/352

Graphic Display 169

TripmeterMENU: TIME/DIST, TRIPMETER

On the display in the menu TRIPMETERthe distance driven for Leg 1 and Leg 2 areshown.

TRIP

#1 43.6 mi

#2 507.3 mi

Reset tripmeter1 Press SELECT in the menu TRIPME-

TER .

2 A new text message with a questionabout the resetting of the tripmeter isshown. The up/down buttons move thecursor between Leg 1 and Leg 2. Con-rm the choice with SELECT or pressEsc in order to cancel the resetting.

RESET?#1: #2:

PRESS SELECT FOR 1S

Average speedMENU: TIME/DIST, AVERAGE SPEED

The average speed is calculated using thedistance driven divided by the time the en-gine has been running (since the lastresetting).

AVERAGESPEED

55.4 mph

Reset average speed1 Press SELECT when the menu AV-

ERAGE SPEED is shown.

2 A new text message with a questionabout the resetting of the averagespeed is shown. Conrm the choicewith SELECT or press Esc in order tocancel the resetting.

RESET?

PRESS SELECT FOR 1S

Page 175: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 175/352

170 Graphic Display

Main Menu: FAULTS?General

When a fault occurs a fault message isshown on the graphic display. There aretwo types of fault messages:

1 Information messages

2 Stop messages

The stop message is always more urgentthan information messages.

Any information and stop messages as wellas the associated symbols are shown auto-matically on the graphic display whendriving. A summary of these symbols isshown in the illustration under page 172.Under the display there are two lamps (ayellow 1 INFO telltale and a red 1 STOPtelltale) that attract the driver’s attentionwhen necessary. When the red (stop) tell-tale lights up and the engine is running, awarning signal is also activated.

Several messages may be active at the sametime. When a new message is activated thenew one is shown instead of the old one.

A down arrow in the graphic display’sright-hand corner means that more mes-sages are active.

Page 176: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 176/352

Graphic Display 171

Information messageThe yellow telltale lights up when an ab-normal state or a risk situation is indicated.In addition to the telltale, a symbol or textis shown on the graphic display at the sametime. For certain symbols, a measurementvalue is also shown.

NOTE! In the event of a warning for lowair pressure no message is shown on thegraphic display, the LED in the gaugelights up instead (together with the masterwarning telltale [see page 84]).

Important! When the 1 INFO telltale

lights up, the specied fault must bechecked at the next stop.

T3008860

Stop message

Failure to take necessary action whenthe 1 STOP telltale is on can ultimately

result in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. Vehiclecrash resulting in personal injury ordeath can occur. Bring the vehicle to asafe stop where the problem can bechecked.

In the event of serious faults, the red1 STOP telltale lights up and a warningbuzzer sounds (if the engine is running). Inaddition to the telltale, a symbol or text isshown on the graphic display at the sametime. For certain symbols, a measurementvalue is also shown.

NOTE! In the event of a warning for lowoil pressure or coolant temperature in theengine no text is shown on the display —the LED in the respective gauge lights upinstead.

T3008861

Page 177: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 177/352

172 Graphic Display

Information symbolsThe yellow 1 INFO telltale lights up and asymbol is shown on the graphic display:

AirbagFor airbag (SRS sys-tem) information, seepage 63.

T3008842

Overheating, in-strumentsThe symbol will beshown when the tem-perature in theinstrument cluster ex-ceeds 198 F (92 C).The instrument lightingbecomes weaker andthe gauges show theminimum reading.When the cab tempera-ture cools theinstrument cluster func-

tions will gradually berestored.

T3008840

Level, washeruidThe washer uid sym-bol lights when thewasher uid is low.

T3008838

Warning, trans-mission oiltemperatureIf the temperature of the transmission oil be-comes too high, aninformation message isshown automaticallywith the text HIGH. It

comes on when thetransmission oil is250 F (120 C) or overfor more than 10 min-utes, or 210 F (100 C)or over for more than30 minutes. The tem-perature is displayedalong with the symbol.

T3008831

Warning, volt-meterIf the battery voltagebecomes too high thevoltmeter’s value isshown automatically aswell as the text TOOHIGH. This warning istriggered at 17 V. Thevoltage is displayedalong with the symbol.

T3008832

Page 178: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 178/352

Graphic Display 173

Warning, tem-perature engineoil

If the engine oil tem-perature becomes toohigh, a stop message isshown automaticallywith the text TOOHIGH. The engine out-put is reduced. Thetemperature limit whichactivates this warningvaries for different en-gines. This limit is setin the engine ECU.

T3008830

Air lter,cloggedThe symbol is shownwhen the air lter sen-sor is restricted. T3008843

Too cold for en-gine brake(VEB) (Volvoengine only)Position 2 on theswitch must not be en-gaged before the enginehas reached operationaltemperature. If position2 is engaged and theengine is too cold, thissymbol is shown and asignal sounds when en-gine braking is carried

out (However, VEB isnot engaged).

T3009913

Fault in the pre-heating

T3008841

Page 179: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 179/352

174 Heating and Air Conditioning

GeneralThree levels of the cab climate systems areavailable. They can be identied by the ap-

pearance of the control panel.The basic system is a heater and defrosterunit only. The heater unit has a rating of atleast 40,000 Btu. W8001116

The manually operated heating and air con-ditioning unit is controlled from the samepanel as the heater system, with theaddition of a switch for turning the air con-ditioning system on (button with the

snowake symbol).W8001003

A variant of the air conditioning systemcan be added as an option. This is calledthe Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)variant. It is identied with the switchmarked aut . It allows all functions of theprevious systems, plus the ability to main-tain the temperature in the cab as set by thedriver. The desired temperature is selected

by the combination of the temperature con-trol setting and the fan speed.

W8001004

The air conditioning only operates whenthe engine is running. Best performancefrom the air conditioning is achieved whenall windows and vents are closed. At alltimes, make sure the cowl fresh air intakeis free from snow, ice, leaves, etc.

NOTE! The air conditioning system is con-tinuously monitored for correct function.The monitor module has a read-out for faultcodes. See page 194 for more information.

Do not attempt to drive with the wind-shield covered by mist, fog or frost. Thevisibility is reduced, which could lead toan accident causing severe personal in-

jury or death.

Page 180: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 180/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 175

Climate Unit Main Control PanelFan Speed ControlThe fan has four speeds and can also beshut off. With the fan control in the 0 posi-tion, air still ows out of the dash vents if the vehicle is moving at highway speedsand if the Fresh Air Control is set for out-side air intake. If the Fresh Air Control isset for full recirculation, the fan has to beon for air to ow out the dash vents.

If equipped with air conditioning, the fan isnot controlled by the system to change fanspeed with changing temperatures. Adjustthe fan speed to the desired air ow.

Fan speed must be selected to meet eitherheating or cooling needs. For the heateronly and manual air conditioning variantsof the climate system, settings of tempera-ture and air ow must be adjusted as oftenas necessary to accommodate changingtemperatures outside and inside the cab.

The ATC system is designed to maintain aconstant temperature in the cab, which isset by the temperature control. As the sys-tem does not make automatic changes of fan speed, a selection of higher or lowerfan speed to allow for more or less air owmay have to be made to achieve the correcttemperature.

W8001466

Page 181: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 181/352

176 Heating and Air Conditioning

Air Distribution ControlThe air distribution control is used to directthe air ow to either the dash vents, oorvents or defroster vents. The lever has de-tentes in the outer and middle positions sothat it can be set without looking at thepanel.

The air ow for the three major settings aredescribed below. Any setting outside of thedetented positions will be a mix of the airows that depends on how far from the de-tented position the lever is.

W8001467

With the control in the leftmostposition, all air is directed outthrough the vents in the dash.

With the control in the middleposition, most air is directed outthrough the oor vents and thecab door window vents. A smallow is directed out through thevents in the dash. This mix isapproximately 80/20.

With the control in the right-most position, most air isdirected out through the frontdash vents to the windshield andcab door windows. A small owis directed out through the ventsin the dash. This mix is approx-imately 70/30.

NOTE! When the air vents on the dash areopen, some air always ow through them.To have maximum air ow to the oor orto the windshield and cab door windows,close the dash vents.

Page 182: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 182/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 177

W8001078

Page 183: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 183/352

178 Heating and Air Conditioning

Fresh Air ControlThe top slide lever is the FreshAir/Recirculation Control. The settings canbe anywhere from full fresh air intake toonly recirculated air. Settings can be chosenanywhere in between to give the desiredow of air. W8001468

In the leftmost position, thefresh air inlet is closed. All airis recirculated within the cab. Itcan be used to heat up or cooldown cab temperature quicklyor to close intake from letting in

odors, etc. with the intake air.

In the middle position, there willbe a 20% addition of fresh airto the 80% of recirculated air.This position is well suited foruse when the air conditioning isengaged so a minimum of warmor cooled air is lost through theevacuation vents, while fresh airis still added to the cab.

In the rightmost position, thefresh air inlet is completelyopen. This is best used whenheat is required (wintertime)and when defrosting or de-icing.

Page 184: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 184/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 179

Temperature ControlThe bottom slide lever is the TemperatureControl which operates the coolant controlvalve. In the leftmost position the ow of coolant is shut off by the control valve,which means no heat from the climate unit.The heat will increase the further to theright the control is moved.

The temperature control should be used asa thermostat, together with the fan speed, to“dial” in the desired temperature whenusing the air conditioning. The desired tem-perature is selected by the combination of the temperature control setting and the fan

speed. For the ATC version, the tempera-ture is automatically maintained to wherethe control was set. If needed, the controlcan be moved to a new setting withoutturning the ATC off.

Using the heater on days when the outsidetemperature is low but there is direct sun-light heating through the windows, the airdistribution control should be set in thecenter position (air directed to the oor)

and the air vents open, and at the sametime, the temperature control should be setaround the middle position. Warm air isthen distributed so that it is warmest at theoor and cooler air is distributed via the airvents on the dash.

When the temperature control is set in oneof the end positions, the temperature at theoor vents and the air vents is the same.

W8001469

Page 185: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 185/352

180 Heating and Air Conditioning

A/C ControlWhen the vehicle is equipped with air con-ditioning, the control panel has a button forengaging the air conditioning compressor.This button is marked with a snowakesymbol. When the A/C is engaged, thegreen LED light in the button is on.

When the air conditioning button ispressed, the fan speed control must be seton 1 through 4 for the air conditioning tostart. If the air conditioning button ispressed when the fan speed control is seton 0, the air conditioning will not start.

To set the air conditioning temperature, ad- just the temperature control and fan speeduntil the desired temperature/air ow hasbeen reached. If the cab temperature needsadjusting, the temperature or fan speed hasto be adjusted again until the new desiredtemperature has been reached.

W8001470

Page 186: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 186/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 181

A/C Automatic ControlWhen the vehicle is equipped with Auto-matic Temperature Control (ATC), thecontrol panel has a button, marked withaut , for engaging the electronic controlunit. When ATC is engaged, the green LEDlight in the button is on.

The ATC air conditioning works with thecoolant control valve as a “thermostat,”making automatic adjustments with inputfrom sensors for air output and for air in-side of the cab. However, the fan speedmay also have to be adjusted, increasing ordecreasing air ow, to achieve correct cab

temperature.To use the ATC, let the system run in themanual mode until the cab temperature hasstabilized at a desirable temperature. Thenpress the aut button to engage the auto-matic control unit. To set a new desiredtemperature, simply slide the temperaturecontrol to a higher or lower setting and thesystem will maintain this new temperaturewithin the ability of the temperature control.

NOTE! Changing from manual to ATCcontrol or the other way, makes the air out-put temperature change 5 to 10 degrees. Asmall correction to the temperature controlis needed after the change has been made.

W8001471

Page 187: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 187/352

182 Heating and Air Conditioning

Air VentsA Closed

B Open

C Lateral Air FlowD Vertical Air Flow

When heating the cab, all vents should beclosed. However, the vents on the outerparts of the dash can be used for defrostingthe cab door windows. When operating theair conditioning, all air vents should be

completely open and the air ow directedupward.

W8001150

Page 188: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 188/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 183

Sleeper Climate UnitGeneralThe sleeper cabs have an optional A/C andheater unit that is located in the passengerside luggage compartment. The sleeper unitoperates from the same heater and air con-ditioning supply as the main unit. Theheater can be operated independently fromthe main unit as long as the engine is run-ning. For the air conditioning to operate,the engine must be running, the air condi-tioning button must be pressed in and thefan control must be set at least for speed 1on the main control panel.

W8002333

Air is taken from the sleeper area through alter in the lower bunk support wall andheated or cooled in the underbunk unit.Outlet air can be directed with the vents inthe side walls (the illustration shows thesleeper vent layout of the VN-770).

For the best results when using the air con-ditioning, direct the air ow upward in the

sleeper area.

W8002033

Page 189: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 189/352

184 Heating and Air Conditioning

Sleeper Climate Unit With ATCThe ATC panel is located on the left side,behind the driver seat and contains a tem-perature control, fan speed control andother controls.

To use the heater, with the engine runningand the air conditioning button on the maincontrol panel in the off position, turn thefan speed control (1) and the temperaturecontrol (2) to the positions that give the de-sired temperature output.

To use the air conditioning, the enginemust be running. Press in either the manualair conditioning button (with manual A/C,the fan switch must be at least on speed 1)or the ATC button on the main controlpanel in the dash. The ATC control unit forthe sleeper climate system will keep thetemperature output to where the tempera-ture control was set. However, the fanspeed may also have to be adjusted, in-creasing or decreasing air ow, to achievecorrect cab temperature.

The air conditioning works together withthe heater to give the desired temperatureoutput. Use the temperature control (2) toadjust the output air temperature by turningthe control counterclockwise (toward theblue eld) for colder air and clockwise (to-ward the red eld) for less cold air. Alsouse the fan speed control (1) to alter theamount of air ow.

W8002038

Panel in VN-420, 610 and 660

W8002014

Panel in VN-770

Page 190: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 190/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 185

Cab VentilationIn sleeper versions (except the VN-770)there is a fresh air vent located on each cabside wall. It opens to two positions so the

air ow can be regulated.The vent also opens toward the front or to-ward the rear. This can be used for forcingair into the cab (open toward the front) orfor venting air out of the cab (open towardthe rear).

CAUTION

The vent should not be used during rain,while washing the vehicle or other cir-cumstances where water may enter thecab while the vent is open. To preventleaks, make sure the handle rollers areon the top center part of the cams.

W8001146

The VN-770 is equipped with 4 hingedside windows in the sleeper area. The VN-

660 has only the upper windows. Do notforce the window crank mechanism in thefully open position. The mechanism can bedamaged if you try to open the window be-yond the stop position.

CAUTIONMake sure windows are closed beforewashing the cab. Water can enter the cabthrough the window opening.

W8001473

Page 191: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 191/352

186 Heating and Air Conditioning

Ventilation GuidelinesIf at any time there is any doubt that ex-haust fumes are entering the cab, have thecause of the fumes determined and cor-rected as soon as possible. If the vehiclemust be driven under these conditions,drive only with all windows open.

Protect against carbon monoxide entry intothe cab. Keep the engine exhaust system,cab and cab ventilation system properlymaintained. It is recommended that the ex-haust system and cab are inspected by acompetent technician:

•At every engine oil change.

• Whenever a change is noticed in thesound of the exhaust system.

• Whenever the exhaust system, under-body or cab is damaged.

Do not breathe the engine exhaust gas. Itcontains carbon monoxide, which has nocolor or odor. Carbon monoxide is adangerous gas which can cause uncon-sciousness or death.

Diesel engine exhaust and some of itsconstituents are known to the state of

California to cause cancer, birth defectsor other reproductive harm.

To allow for proper operation of the vehicleventilation system, keep the inlet grille atthe base of the windshield clear of snow,ice, leaves and other obstructions at alltimes.

Do not park the vehicle and let the enginerun or idle for more than 10 minutes withthe ventilation system control switch in theoff position. Even with the ventilation sys-tem on, running the engine while parked orstopped for long periods of time is not rec-ommended. Entry of carbon monoxide intothe cab is possible with a poorly repaired,

damaged or corroded exhaust system or cab.Do not run the engine in conned areas,such as garages or next to a building, anymore than necessary. The area must beproperly ventilated. When the vehicle mustbe stopped with the engine running formore than a few minutes:

• Adjust the heating or cooling systemto force outside air into the cab. Do

this by setting the fan to medium orhigh speed and with the controls set inany position except for recirculation of air inside of the cab.

• Keep the exhaust pipe area clear tohelp reduce the buildup of exhaust gasunder the vehicle.

Page 192: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 192/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 187

Cab Air FiltersAir going into the cab passes a lter lo-cated on the right, front side of the cab.Remove the lter and clean with an air gun

(no more than 20 psi pressure) after 40,000miles (64,000 km), (in dusty conditions asoften as every 10,000 miles [16,000 km]).Make sure the air stream is directed fromthe inside out.

The lter should not be cleaned and reusedmore than once. Replace with a new lterafter maximum 70,000 miles (110,000 km),or earlier if driving in dusty conditions. Aclogged lter decreases the efciency of theair conditioning system. W8002474

If the vehicle is equipped with a sleeperheater-A/C, there is a lter for the recircu-lating air. This is located behind thepassenger seat on the bunk support. The l-ter should be checked and cleaned after40,000 miles (64,000 km), (in dusty condi-tions as often as every 10,000 miles [16,000km]). Clean as the cab air lter. Replacelter after 100,000 miles (160,000 km).

To inspect or to change the lter, open lug-gage storage lid and pull out lter. W8002473

Page 193: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 193/352

188 Heating and Air Conditioning

Parking Heater (optional)

Do not fuel the vehicle or handleammable liquids in the vicinity of anoperating parking heater. The fuelvapors can be ignited, causing an explo-sion or re resulting in severe personalinjury or death.

Do not store ammable items close tothe parking heater or put items on top of it. Flammable items should not be closerthan 2 inches (50 mm). The item mayignite and cause a re resulting in severepersonal injury or death.

Do not run heater while vehicle is in anenclosed area. The exhaust gasses con-tain carbon monoxide (CO). If notvented to the atmosphere, there could bea buildup of dangerous levels of COwhich may lead to unconsciousness andlater death.

WARNINGThe parking heater is a very hot object.Do not touch the heater when it is in op-eration or shortly thereafter. Touching aheater may cause burns to exposed skin.

CAUTIONThe heater air cab inlet is located in thebunk wall in front of the heater. Do not

attempt to put small items or store atitems between the bunk and the cabi-net/refrigerator. The air intake can beblocked which causes the heater to over-heat and shut down.

The parking heater is a diesel fuel burnerthat heats the air in the cab. Air is takenfrom the cab and returned heated up. Com-bustion air and exhaust is taken from andreleased to the outside air.

To safeguard from the heater operating af-ter a turnover accident, there is a fuelshut-off valve in the fuel delivery system.

Page 194: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 194/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 189

GeneralA fuel heated parking heater is available asan option. It is located in the left hand lug-gage compartment. The heater providesautomatically regulated heat that is dis-tributed through its own vents into thesleeper section of the cab.

W8002480

Timer/ClockThe heater is operated by a combined timerfor the heater and a clock with built inalarm. See page 225 for information to setthe clock and alarm.

T8007012

ThermostatTo be able to regulate the temperature inthe sleeper while the parking heater is op-erating, there is a thermostat for setting thedesired temperature. It is located in thesleeper panel, close to the timer/clock.

The thermostat control range is between54 to 83 F (12 to 28 C).

The green indicator lamp lights up onlywhen the heater is operating.

W8002015

Page 195: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 195/352

190 Heating and Air Conditioning

Timer/Clock Modes

W8001916

The timer/clock has four modes that can beaccessed by pressing the MODE button.The modes are arranged in a continuous

loop. To access the next mode, press theMODE button until the correct function ap-pears in the window.

Display Mode SymbolsThe three symbols illustrated below can beshown on the display.

Symbol showing that the alarm function is selected.See page 225 for information to operate clock/alarm.

Symbol shows that the parking heater is on. See page 191 for information ondirect and rapid start.

Symbol shows that the time delay start of the parking heater is on. See page191 for information to set start with time delay.

Page 196: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 196/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 191

Rapid Start/Stop Of the Parking HeaterTo use the rapid start/stop function of thetimer, there is no need to access the correctfunction by the MODE button. This opera-

tion works independently of the timeroperation.

To start the parking heater manually, press in both the up and the down but-tons at the same time for at least 3 seconds.The heater will now run for 8 hours and then it switches off automatically.

To stop the parking heater manually, press in both the up and the down but-tons at the same time for at least 3 seconds.

Parking Heater Direct Start, With Set Operating Time

Symbol for direct start of parking heater. The symbol ashes until the func-tion is changed.

To select the function to start the parking heater, use the "MODE" button toswitch between functions until the direct start symbol appears.

Press the SET button. The hour digits start to ash.

Press the up button to set the number of hour the parking heater shouldoperate. Only complete hours or 0 - 59 minutes can be set. The letter h ap-pears after the indicated hour digit.

Accept the indicated time by pressing SET. The display will show ON,meaning that the heater is ready to be started.

If the heater is not to be started, press one of the up or down buttons andOFF is now displayed. To alternate between ON and OFF, press the up ordown button.

Accept that the heater is to be ON or OFF by pressing SET. The heater willstart and run for the set time if ON was chosen or stand by if OFF was cho-sen. At the same time as the SET button is pressed, the display returns tothe clock function.

If the time setting was not completed, thedisplay returns to the clock function 30seconds after the last button was pressed.

Page 197: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 197/352

192 Heating and Air Conditioning

Parking Heater Delayed Start

Symbol for delayed start of parking heater. The symbol ashes until thefunction is changed.

To select the function to start the parking heater, use the "MODE" button toswitch between functions until the delayed start symbol appears.

Press the SET button. The hour digits start to ash.

Set the hour digits to the time when it is desired that the heater should start.The up button increases the time delay and the down button decreases thetime delay.

Accept the delay hours by pressing the SET button.

Set the minute digits the same way as the hour digits were set.

Accept the delay minutes by pressing the SET button. The display willchange to ON. This means that the heater is ready to start when the set timehas been reached.

If the heater is not to be started with the time delay, press one of the up ordown buttons and OFF is now displayed. To alternate between ON and OFF,press the up or down button, which means that the time delay for the heateris engaged or disengaged.Accept that the heater starts at the set time. At the same time as the buttonis pressed, the display returns to the clock function.

If the time setting was not completed, thedisplay returns to the clock function 30seconds after the last button was pressed.

Page 198: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 198/352

Heating and Air Conditioning 193

Heater Shut-Downs

• If the heater does not start withintwo 60 second start attempts, a "nostart" shut-down occurs.

• If a ameout occurs after the heaterhas started, the heater will attemptto restart. If repeated ameouts oc-cur within 10 minutes, the heaterwill not restart.

• Overheat shut-down will occur if there is a restriction of the heatingair ow (that is: blocked inlet oroutlet). The automatic overheatswitch will reset once the heater hascooled down.

• The blower motor is checked onstart-up and every 4 minutes. Shut-down will occur if the blower doesnot start or maintain proper speed.

If any of these events should occur, the unitshould be checked out by a qualied heatertechnician or contact the manufacturer.

Page 199: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 199/352

194 Heating and Air Conditioning

A/C Diagnostic ModuleProblem CodesThe diagnostic module has two LED lights(one green and one red) which indicate if asystem problem has been detected. If aproblem is detected, a fault code or “blink”code is activated to identify the condition.The blink codes listed on the label are:

Slow Green Normal

Fast Green Low system voltage

1 Red Blink Loss of refrigerant

2 Red Blinks Overcharge, blockage orfan failure

3 Red Blinks Open or shorted clutchor circuit

4 Red Blinks Open pressure switch orcircuit

The air conditioning system is underpressure. The possibility of an explosionis possible if serviced incorrectly. Aqualied technician should perform anyservice needed. Failure to follow thismay lead to an explosion causing severeinjury or death.

W3002004

Page 200: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 200/352

Seats 195

GeneralSeveral different seats can be used in thevehicles. If the seat installed in the vehicle

is not explained in this section, look for theseat manufacturer’s manual in the Owner’sPackage.

On the driver’s side there is a standard seatand an upgrade that includes adjustable aircushions for lumbar and thigh-back sup-port, arm rests and a frame cover. The topof the line is a Volvo comfort seat.

The passenger side can have the same type

of seat as on the driver’s side and also axed seat. Each of the seats are describedon the pages that follow.

All adjustments are to be made whilethe operator is seated and the vehicle isstationary. Do not adjust the seat posi-tion while driving the vehicle. Failure tofollow this warning can result in loss of vehicle control, which can result in seri-ous personal injury or death in the eventof a crash.

Before adjusting or fastening the seat belt,move the seat forward or rearward and ad- just the seat height as necessary. Sit erectand adjust the seat cushion and seat back toobtain a comfortable driving position.

W8002743

National Standard Seat

W8002742

National Comfort Seat

T8006503

Volvo Comfort Seat

Page 201: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 201/352

Page 202: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 202/352

Seats 197

National Comfort Seat Adjustments8 Lumbar support adjustment: Push the

upper part of the switch to inate thelower part of the 3–chamber support.

Push the lower part to deate it.9 Lumbar support adjustment: Push the

upper part of the switch to inate themiddle part of the 3–chamber support.Push the lower part to deate it.

10 Lumbar support adjustment: Push theupper part of the switch to inate theupper part of the 3–chamber support.Push the lower part to deate it.

11 Back rest side support: Push the upperpart of the switch to inate the sup-port. Push the lower part to deate it.

12 Seat cushion side support: Push theupper part of the switch to inate thesupport. Push the lower part to deateit.

13 Front seat cushion adjustment: Pushthe switch up or down to chooseheight position.

14 Armrest angle adjustment: Ratchetingarmrest. Set to desired angle.

W8002

Page 203: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 203/352

198 Seats

Volvo Standard Seat Adjustments1 Fore and aft movement: Press the con-

trol down to unlock the seat cushion.Move seat cushion fore or aft to a new

position.2 Cushion front tilt: Push the control

down and adjust the tilt of the seatcushion.

3 Ride height adjustment: Push or pullthe control to change ride height.

4 Lift the lever up to adjust the top partof the seat back.

5 Push the lever down to adjust thewhole backrest.

6 The lumbar support is adjusted byturning the knob clockwise for rmingand counterclockwise for slackeningthe support.

7 The angle of the armrest is adjustedwith the dial control on the undersideof the armrest.

W8002387

Page 204: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 204/352

Page 205: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 205/352

200 Seats

All the seat cushions are easily removed.Grab the edge of the cushion (not by theplastic base) and pull up or out.

W8001915

Back RestThe whole back rest angle is adjusted with

control 5. Push the bottom part of the but-ton forward or backward. The back rest canbe adjusted through 15 degrees of move-ment.

The upper back rest angle is adjusted withcontrol 6. Push the top part of the buttonforward or backward. The upper back restcan be adjusted through 15 degrees of movement.

W8001830

Page 206: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 206/352

Seats 201

Back Rest SupportIn the middle of the back rest there arethree inatable cushions (1, 2 and 3) thatsupports the lumbar region of the back.Each cushion is controlled by an individualcontrol. Move each control, 1, 2 or 3, for-ward to inate or rearward to deate therespective cushion.

On the sides of the back rest there arecushions (4) for the side support of theback. Both cushions are controlled by con-trol 4. Move the control forward to inateor rearward to deate cushions.

Seat HeaterThere are two heater elements (5) in theseat. One in the seat cushion and one in thelower part of the back rest. They are oper-ated by the switch 5 on the side panel.

The elements are regulated by internal ther-mostats and will therefore hold a steadytemperature.

W8001829

Page 207: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 207/352

202 Seats

National Stationary SeatFor the passenger side, there is the optionof a stationary seat. The base of the seat isa storage box that is accessed by lifting the

seat cushion up.

W8001386

No Passenger Seat (option)

Using a temporary passenger seatingwithout the benet of proper seat

mounting and safety belt can, in theevent of a loss of control of the vehicle,cause serious personal injury or death.

In vehicles with no passenger seat installed.Do not let a passenger ride on temporaryseating. This is against the law and can bevery dangerous.

Page 208: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 208/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 203

Interior/Reading LightsFront Of CabThe cab is equipped with separate andcombined interior and reading lights in var-ious locations in the cab. The front seatoverhead lights can be turned on at anytime using the switch in the xture. Byturning the switch the other way, the lightwill be activated by the cab door switches.Any time the door is opened, the lightcomes on. When the switch is in the mid-dle position, the light does not light upeven when the door is opened.

W3003981

There is also a light on the inner front faceof the door that can be activated by theswitch or be set to come on when the dooropens. The lens is red so the light is usedto alert oncoming trafc from the rear thatthe door is open. It is also used duringnight driving to light up the oor area andsteps without distracting the operator with a

glaring light.W3000974

The door switch operates all door-activatedlights. The switch is located in the rear partof the door frame.

The switch has a shut off function that canbe used if the door needs to be open andthe lights should not be on. To deactivatethe lights, grasp the stem of the switch withtwo ngers, push it in and twist clockwise.The stem stays in and the light is off.When the switch stem is pushed in and re-leased, either by hand or by the door, itwill return to the normal working position.

W3000970

Page 209: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 209/352

204 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Sleeper SectionThe sleeper section has individual bunk light xtures for all types of sleeper cabs.They are of the same type as the frontoverhead lights. They are operated by theswitch on the xture.

There are overhead uorescent lights in theVN-610, VN-660, and VN–770.

W3002425

The uorescent overhead lights can be op-erated from the sleeper panel switch.

W3001351

For the VN-770 model, there is also aswitch for the overhead uorescent light inthe left hand switch cluster on the dash.This switch can be reached from outsidethe cab door to enable the light to be turnedon without having to climb into the cab.

W3002002

Page 210: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 210/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 205

There is a separate uorescent light overthe table in the VN-770, and an incandes-cent light over the table in the VN-660.There is a switch in the sleeper panel onthe driver side wall.

W3002332

A sleeper panel light is provided for theVN-770 model. The light is located in theupper part of the panel and is operated by aswitch located on the panel.

W3002334

Page 211: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 211/352

206 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Storage Compartments

Heavy objects must be stored only in theoutside storage areas or secured on theoor. Cabinets and storage compart-ments are designed for clothing andlighter personal effects only. In the eventof a collision, heavy, unsecured objectsin overhead storage can come loose andcause severe personal injury or death tothe driver or passengers.

WARNINGAll items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a collision, loose items couldy around inside the cab. This couldcause personal injury.

CAUTION

Do not overload the cab suspension.Make sure the weight distribution isequal in the cab. Total load for the cabsuspension in the daycab, VN-420,VN-610 and VN-660 is 800 lb (360 kg),with driver and passenger included. To-tal load for the cab suspension in theVN-770 is 1,000 lb (455 kg), with driverand passenger included. Overloading thesuspension leads to poor ride and low-

ered driving comfort.

Front Overhead StorageThere are several combinations of the over-head storage compartments mounted overthe windshield. The compartments are splitin the middle and they can be combined to

cover the whole width of the cab or justover the driver.

The storage compartments have a maxi-mum storage weight limit of approximately18 lb (8 kg) per section. That is, the limitcovers each compartment section, either leftor right side.

W8001098

Page 212: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 212/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 207

VN-610 and VN-660 StorageThe VN-610 sleeper overhead storagecomes in two sizes. If the sleeper containsan upper bunk, only the short cabinets areavailable. Each cabinet has a netting thatcovers the opening to hold items in placeduring driving.

The short compartment load limit is 33 lb(15 kg). The long compartment load limitis 40 lb (18 kg).

In both VN-610 and VN-660 there are twooor cabinets — a clothes hanger cabinetand a drawer cabinet. The drawers havelatches for holding them in place duringdriving. The top drawer also has a key lock so it can be used to store documents. Thereis also a pull-out writing tablet in the toppart of the cabinet.

The drawer cabinet load limits are 9.5 lb(4.3 kg) for the top drawer and 14.5 lb(6.5 kg) each for the two lower drawers.The drawer cabinet is substituted for a re-frigerator when this option is chosen. Theclothes hanger cabinet does not have a loadlimit since it is resting on the oor.

W8001394

W8001395

In the VN-660 with an upper bunk, thereare two overhead storage cabinets. Thelarger opening is covered with netting forholding items in place during driving. Theload limit for the cabinets is 10 lb (4.5 kg)

per shelf or 30 lb (14 kg) total per eachcabinet.

W8002332

Page 213: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 213/352

208 Cab Interior and Sleeper

In both the VN-610 and VN-660, access tothe luggage compartment is made by liftingthe lower bunk. The bunk support is alsothe cover for the luggage compartment. Thebunk support is counterweighted with gassprings that make lifting easy.

To open, release the latch mechanism andlift the bunk. Remove heavy items from topof the bunk before opening.

W8002021

The VN-610 front overhead roof storageoffers extra storage for smaller items. Loadlimits are 3 lb (1.5 kg) for the side com-partments and 5 lb (2.5 kg) for the centercompartment.

W8001096

The VN-660 front overhead roof storage isthe same as for the VN-770.

Load limits for the right and left sections,are 5 lb (2.5 kg) for upper shelf and 15 lb

(7 kg) for lower shelf. Load limit for thecenter section side shelves and the centershelf is 3 lb (1.5 kg) each.

W8001861

Page 214: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 214/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 209

VN-770 StorageRear wall storage in the VN-770 varies de-pending on if an upper bunk option ischosen or not.

The smaller storage units are also stereospeaker holders and mountings for the bunk restraint latches. Each opening is coveredwith a netting for keeping stored items inplace. The top netting bar is spring loaded.To access the opening, press the bar down.

Load limit for the middle, large openingstorage unit is 3 lb (1.5 kg) for the sideopenings and 11 lb (5 kg) for the centeropening. The smaller (top and under upperbunk) storage load limit is 3 lb (1.5 kg) forthe outer openings and 11 lb (5 kg) for thecenter opening.

W8001858

The driver side storage upper part can beeither a pantry-type cabinet with doors (seeillustration) or an open cabinet with netting

covering the storage openings (not illus-trated). The pantry has an optional 120 Velectrical connection for a microwave oven.The doors have latches that are accessed byhand from the bottom part of the door.

Load limits are: 5 lb (2.5 kg) for the topshelf, 15 lb (7 kg) for the upper shelvesand 33 lb (15 kg) for the microwave shelf.

W8001865

Page 215: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 215/352

210 Cab Interior and Sleeper

The driver side storage bottom part cancontain a refrigerator. If a refrigerator is notdelivered with the vehicle, it is fully pre-pared for installing one at a later time.

W8001912

The passenger side storage upper part isprepared for TV and video. There is alsogeneral storage above. There is an optional120 V electrical connection available foraccessories.

Load limits are: 5 lb (2.5 kg) for the topshelf, 15 lb (7 kg) for the upper shelvesand 33 lb (15 kg) for the TV shelf.

W8001862

The passenger side storage bottom part is aclothes cabinet. It is equipped with doorsthat latch closed when shut.

W8001867

Page 216: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 216/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 211

On the passenger side of the lower bunk,there is a storage cabinet for items that donot need to be at hand at all times. In thedaytime, this storage area is hidden by thebackrest cushions.

W8001870

Access to the luggage compartment ismade on both sides through a hatch underthe outer bunk cushions. The hatches aresecured with a rubber cord. To open thehatch, loosen the cord and pull up the hatchwith it. On the VN-660, there is a velcrostrap to hold the lid in the open position.

W8001873

In the front part of the cab roof there is ad-ditional storage. Load limits for the rightand left sections, are 5 lb (2.5 kg) for uppershelf and 15 lb (7 kg) for lower shelf. Loadlimit for the center section side shelves andthe center shelf is 3 lb (1.5 kg) each.

W8001861

Page 217: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 217/352

212 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Sleeper Bunks

GeneralThere is only one bunk available for theVN-420. For the VN-610, 660 and 770, anupper bunk is available and a lower bunk isstandard.

The bunks for the VN-420, 610 and 660cover the luggage compartment. They arehinged for access to luggage from inside of the cab.

To gain access, release the latch mechanismand lift by the edge of the bunk platform.Gas springs aid in opening and closing theplatform.

W8002021

WARNINGSupport the bunk with one hand whilereleasing the latches. Failure to supportthe bunk may lead to the bunk fallingwithout control, causing personal injury.

The upper bunks for the VN-610, 660 and770 are also hinged and can be raised outof the way. The VN-610 and VN-660 usethe safety bunk harness latch for holdingthe bunk up. The VN-770 has latches onboth sides of the wall that hold the bunk inposition. To release the latches, pull the

latch strap in the middle of the bunk under-side. Support the bunk before release so itdoes not fall unaided.

When the bunk is raised and latched, makesure that the latches on both sides close andhold the bunk properly. For more informa-tion on bunk safety restraints, see page 53.

W8001885

Page 218: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 218/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 213

VN-660 Bunk AccessTo climb up to the upper bunk, use thegrabhandles and footstep mounted on theright hand side cabinet.

Always have three limbs (one foot andtwo hands or two feet and one hand) incontact with the oor, bunk or step at alltimes when entering or exiting the upperbunk. Failure to follow this procedurecan lead to a fall and cause severe per-sonal injury or death.

Start the climb by grabbing the grabhandleswith both hands. Place the right foot on thebunk bottom to the right of the cabinet andthe left foot on the upper step, as shown.Put both feet on the upper step and movethe right hand to the upper bunk for sup-port. Swing the upper body into the bunk and sit down.

W0001769

Page 219: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 219/352

214 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN-770 Bunk AccessIn the VN-770, there are two ways of climbing to the upper bunk. There is al-ways a footstep available, located in the

passenger side cabinet. Place the left footon the footstep while holding on to thegrab handle (illustrated below). Hold on tothe handle in the middle of the bunk frontedge and pull up into the bunk.

W8001886

The grab handle for upper bunk access islocated on the cabinet.

W8001910

Page 220: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 220/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 215

WARNINGSupport the ladder with one hand whilereleasing the lock straps. Failure to sup-port the ladder may lead to the ladderfalling out, causing injury to leg or foot.

An upper bunk ladder is also available.This is stored in its collapsed position be-hind the passenger side cabinet. To releasethe ladder, unsnap the lock straps. Supportthe ladder so it does not fall out unaided.

W8001888

The ladder unfolds out to provide a conve-nient climb to the upper bunk

W8001887

Page 221: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 221/352

216 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Before using the ladder to enter the up-per bunk, make sure the free ladder legis supported both at the upper catch andat the lower peg. Failure to secure theladder leg may result in a fall and seri-ous personal injury or death.

When the ladder is folded out, lift the outerleg and guide it into the catch that is lo-cated on the upper bunk.

W8001890

Lower the leg down and place the peg intothe hole at the bottom. Test the ladder bypulling on it before climbing up.

W8001889

WARNINGWhen folding the ladder back into stor-age position, make sure ngers are outof the way. If ngers are on the insidesection of the upright pole, they may be

pinched in the scissoring action of thefolding ladder.

Page 222: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 222/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 217

VN-660 and VN–770 Sleeper Table

Do not sit at the table when the vehicleis moving. It is intended for use onlywhen the vehicle is parked. Passengersshould be in the passenger seat wearingthe safety belt or in the bunk with thebunk restraint attached. Failure to followthese instructions may result in severepersonal injury or death in the event of asudden stop or accident.

An advisory label is attached on the rearface of the driver side cabinet.

W8001898

To raise the table, remove the cushionsfrom the bunk and put them to the sides.

W8001891

Release the latch by pulling the handle un-derneath the tabletop. Raise the tableslightly.

W8001893

Page 223: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 223/352

218 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Line up the latch pegs with the holes in theback wall.

W8001892

Push the table rmly into the holes. Makesure the latches have caught properly bypulling out on the table.

W8001894

When the table is in place, put the cushionsin place to form a seat and backrest.

W8001895

Page 224: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 224/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 219

To lower the table, remove the cushionsand pull the handle underneath the tabletopto release the latches. Lower the table to itsresting position.

Place the seat cushions toward the wallsand then position the backrest cushions asillustrated.

W8001896

Press down on the cushions in the middleto form a mattress.

W8001897

Page 225: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 225/352

220 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Sleeper Compartment Sink A built-in sink is available as optionalequipment for the VN-770 sleeper model. Itis located on the left side, in the cabinet be-

hind the driver.

The sink is mounted in the drawer space.To pull out, grasp the drawer lip and re-lease the latch. Pull out until the faucet canbe raised without hitting the cabinet.

CAUTIONNever run the pump without water in thefreshwater tank. The pump may be dam-aged if run dry.

W8002162

To operate the water pump there is a com-bined valve and switch in the knob (1) onthe base. Turn on the 12V switch on thesleeper switch panel to the left of the tower

cabinet, then turn the knob slightly to startthe pump. Turn the knob further to increasewater ow. When the knob is turned fullyback to rest position, the pump will stop.

CAUTIONMake sure the pump is turned off beforepushing the drawer in. If the pump con-tinues to deliver water, overowing

water can ood the cab oor.

In the bottom of the sink there is a springloaded drain plug that is sealed by pressingdown and twisting clockwise. To releasefor letting water drain off, turn counter-clockwise and the spring will lift the plugand open the drain.

W8002161

Page 226: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 226/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 221

Fresh Water Tank Water is drawn from the fresh water tank (1) located beside the waste water tank (2)in the left hand side luggage compartment.

Rell fresh water tank with potable drink-ing water only. Tank volume is 9 gallons(34 liters). On top of the tank is a hose (3)that serves as a ller and a vent tube. In thebottom of the tank is a drain valve (4), witha hose attached, for draining the tank to theoutside.

It is not recommended to let water remainunused in the tank for over 2 months.Clean and rell as necessary.

W8002168

CAUTION

USE POTABLE DRINKING WATERONLY. Verify with the supplier of anywater prior to lling the fresh water tank that it is potable to avoid contaminationof the tank. In the event that non-potableor contaminated water enters the freshwater tank, it should be drained and thetank should be cleaned out with a goodcommercial cleaner/disinfectant. Thetank should also be tested for purityprior to being used for drinking. It maybe necessary to replace the tank if itcannot be cleaned properly.

CAUTIONFresh water and waste water tanks mustbe drained if the vehicle is not beingused and the outside temperature is be-low freezing. Also drain the hose fromthe pump to the faucet. Failure to drainthe system may result in componentdamage due to water forming ice.

Page 227: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 227/352

222 Cab Interior and Sleeper

To ll the fresh water tank, unscrew the llhose from the elbow tting and remove thell cap (5) from the tank. The ll hoseshould be connected to a hose with agardenhose-type tting. Before turning thewater on, turn the valve handle (6) on thell hose to the side to close the valve (seelower illustration). When the end of the llhose is inserted in the water reservoir, openthe valve slowly to ll. The valve is fullyopen when the handle is parallel with thehose.

W8002167

When the tank is lled, reinstall the llhose on the elbow tting. Do not tightenmore than nger tight. Make sure that thevalve handle now is fully open (1) to allowventing. If the valve is left in any of theclosed positions (2), the pumped out watermay generate an under-pressure in the tank,interfering with the pump operation.

NOTE! The valve positions are shown asviewed from inside the cab.

W8002169

Page 228: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 228/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 223

Waste Water Tank When the water is drained from the sink, itis collected in a waste water tank behindthe fresh water tank. Waste water tank vol-

ume is 5 gallons (19 liters). The tank isfastened to the oor with a strap that canbe easily opened for tank removal.

Before removing the waste water tank,loosen the strap around the tank and un-screw the drain hose from the inlet cap.Carry the tank to an approved dump stationand empty by removing the inlet cap andtilting the tank up to let the waste waterdrain.

Flush the tank with fresh water. Replacethe inlet cap, strap the tank into the cab andattach the drain hose.

W8002170

Page 229: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 229/352

224 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Miscellaneous Sleeper EquipmentSleeper Clock/Alarm

Clock ModesThe clock has four modes that can be ac-cessed by pressing the MODE button. Themodes that are not for clock or alarm func-tion are described on page 190.

T8007012

Display Mode Symbols

To set the clock or to set the alarm, use the "MODE" button to switch be-tween functions.

The three symbols illustrated below can beshown on the display.

Symbol showing that the alarm function is selected.

Symbol for the parking heater. See page 189 for information.

Symbol for the parking heater. See page 189 for information.

Page 230: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 230/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 225

Clock FunctionSetting Clock

Press in the "SET" button for 3 seconds and the hour digits will start to ash.

Set the hour by pressing the up or down arrow button. The time can eitherbe set as an AM-PM or 24-hour mode. To go from the 24-hour mode to theAM-PM mode, continue to press one of the arrow buttons until the newmode is shown.

Accept the hour by pressing the "SET" button. The minute digits will nowstart to ash.

Set the minute by pressing the up or down arrow button.

Accept the minute by pressing the "SET" button. The clock is now set.

Page 231: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 231/352

226 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Alarm FunctionWhen the alarm function is selected, thefollowing can be operated:

Setting Alarm Time

Press the "MODE" button until the bell symbol appears in the window.

Press the "SET" button. The hour digits will begin to ash.

Set the alarm time hour with the up or down arrow button.

Press the "SET" button to accept the hour. The minute digits will now start

to ash.

Set the alarm time minute with the up or down arrow button.

Press the "SET" button to accept the minute. The display "ON" now appears.

The set time can now be selected as either the alarm "ON" or alarm "OFF."This is alternated by pressing one of the arrow buttons.

To accept the alarm "ON" or "OFF," press the "SET" button. The mode nowreturns to clock function. If the alarm is set, a solid bell symbol appears inthe display. If no alarm is set, only the time will be displayed.

When the clock reaches the set time foralarm, and providing the alarm was set, abuzzer sounds intermittently for 60 sec-onds. To turn the buzzer off, press anybutton once.

If the alarm time setting has not been com-pleted, the display returns to the clock function 30 seconds after the last buttonwas pressed.

Switching Off Alarm Buzzer

The buzzer is switched off by pressing any of the buttons. The alarm mustbe re-activated before the buzzer will operate again.

Page 232: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 232/352

Page 233: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 233/352

228 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN-660 and VN–770 Side WindowsThe VN-770 has four and the VN-660 hastwo sleeper side windows that are used forventilation. When running the air condi-

tioning, it recommended that the windowsbe closed.

In the event of hard rain, the windowsshould be closed to prevent water from en-tering the cab.

The windows also serve as emergency es-cape exits. In the event of an emergency,kick the window open and climb out.

W8001473

The windows are operated with a knob thatis turned clockwise or counterclockwise toopen or close the window.

Do not force the window crank mechanismin the fully open position. The mechanismcan be damaged trying to open the windowbeyond the stop position.

W8001856

Page 234: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 234/352

Cab Interior and Sleeper 229

Cup HoldersOn the rear face of one or both sleeper cab-inets are cup holders. They normally arefolded up. To use, fold down the base and

fold up the support.

W8001881

There is also a cup holder in the middle of the dash. To open, press the top part of thelid in and the lid will fold out. To close,press the lid in until the latch closes.

There are also two cupholders molded intothe engine cover.

W8001875

Page 235: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 235/352

230 Cab Interior and Sleeper

CurtainsCurtains are available for all the sleepercabs to ensure privacy and to darken thecabin from outside light. Various congura-

tions are available. Curtains can cover thewhole windshield area or go across thesleeper opening.

W8001877

When the curtains are not in use, they arestored out of the way and held in place

with velcro straps.

W8001880

Covers for the VN-660 are to be stored in arolled-up position in the opening behind thecabinet.

The covers for the VN-770 side windowsare stored behind the backrest cushions. Allcovers are put on with snap buttons that are

on the cover and window rim.

W8001911

Page 236: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 236/352

Communication and Entertainment 231

AntennasMultiband AntennaThere are antennas mounted on the top of the mirror brackets for wideband reception.They receive or send signals for radio, CBand telephone. Each antenna carries multi-ple wire windings that work together withmirror bracket devices to cover the needs of many uses.

If the antenna is damaged, replace it onlywith a multiband type antenna. A regularantenna does not have the wiring necessaryto give good reception for all uses.

W3001997

TV AntennaFor the VN-770, the TV antenna is stan-dard equipment. It is mounted to the insideof the headliner connected with a coaxialcable to the cabinet.

VN-610 and VN-660 antenna is accessiblein the cabinet.

CAUTIONDo not pierce or drill through the head-liner. The TV antenna may be damaged.

W3002010

Page 237: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 237/352

232 Communication and Entertainment

Antenna Multiplexer

W3002455

1 Cellular Phone Antenna Cable2 Radio Antenna Cable3 Left Side Antenna

4 CB Radio Antenna Cable5 Right Side Antenna

Communications signals that travel to andfrom the antennas go through the antenna

multiplexer. It is standard in the VN–660and VN-770, and optional on other models.Coaxial cables for the cellular phone, CBradio and radio are included in the multi-plexer system — all using the same set of antennas.

The multiplexer is accessed through thelower dash panels. Cable routing is as

shown in the illustration above. Use onlygenuine Volvo replacement parts for thismultiplexer system; standard antennas willgive unsatisfactory performance. The wind-ings in the antennas are specic to thissystem: different sections of the antenna areused for the cellular phone, radio and CB.

Page 238: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 238/352

Communication and Entertainment 233

Stereo/RadioStereoThe radio is mounted in the right hand sideof the dash. Several models are available,from a basic unit to top of the line. In theVN-770, there is also a CD-changer avail-able which is controlled from the unit inthe dash.

Depending on the model, there are someimportant features built into the unit. Takethe time to read the manufacturer’s manualto be able to operate functions such as ra-dio wake-up alarm, snooze function and

theft-deterrent coding.W3002006

CD-ChangerA CD-changer is available for VN–660 andVN-770. It is located in the passenger sideoverhead storage. The power amp is locatedin the same storage. There can be 4 to 9speakers in the cab. The subwoofer is lo-cated in the lower bunk support.

Read the manufacturer’s manual for opera-tional information.

W3002428

W3002429

Page 239: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 239/352

234 Communication and Entertainment

Communication EquipmentCB RadioThere is an optional platform provided fora CB radio on top of the dash. The unit isheld in place with a strap which can ac-commodate a variety of sizes. For electricalhook-up, see page 304.

The CB Radio can also be permanentlymounted directly above the radio. When theoptional switch panel is removed, a DINstandard radio mount is available.

W8001876

TelephoneThere is room on the dash for a mobiletelephone. This can be hooked up to themultiplex box.

If the vehicle is delivered with a multiplexbox, the connecting end of the telephonecoaxial cable should be located at the lowerdash cover.

W3002427

Road RelayThe Road Relay is an engine communica-tion tool that allows the driver to have fuelconsumption, time and mileage readoutsand also programmed reminders for serviceintervals. The Road Relay should be per-manently mounted directly above the radio.

Collected data can be downloaded for usein a stationary computer where the data canbe collected and compared over time.

W3002420

Page 240: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 240/352

Communication and Entertainment 235

Television

WARNING

All items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a sudden stop or collision, looseitems could y around inside the cab.This could cause personal injury.

The VN-610, VN-660 and VN-770 are al-ready equipped for TV with a pre-installedantenna. The TV should be installed in thepassenger side cabinet where there is astandard 12 V connection or an optional120 V connection.

To prevent the TV set from moving whenthe vehicle is driven, the strap in the TVstorage area should be clamped tightaround the set. If the strap comes loosefrom the buckle, thread it as illustrated. Ad- just the strap so it is tight around the setand then clamp the buckle down to lock itin place. The strap is wound around the TVas a loop, through the holddown brackets.Locate the buckle where it can be reachedmost easily.

W8002366

Page 241: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 241/352

236 Communication and Entertainment

There is an optional television speakeravailable, located in the top of the sleeperswitch panel. Beside the speaker, there is a jack for headphones. This is provided forsilent viewing of the TV. When the headset jack is plugged in, the speaker is cut out.

W3002431

Page 242: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 242/352

Fuel Economy Driving 237

Fuel Economy

GeneralThe absolute fuel consumption (counted inmiles per US gallon or liters per 100 kilo-meters) is determined by a large number of circumstances which can be related to oneof the following main areas:

1 Build specication and equipment

2 Service and maintenance

3 External environment

4 Driving habits

Due to these factors, fuel consumption canvary considerably within what is called“normal fuel consumption.” Fuel consump-tion can vary from over 10 mpg (20 L/100km) when driving empty on a nice and drysummer road to 3.5 mpg (70 L/100 km)while driving with maximum permitted

GVW, with vehicle and trailer, on a hillyand slushy winter road.

Build Specication and EquipmentWhenever a vehicle is used for transporta-tion, its build specication, equipment andgross vehicle weight have a decisive effecton both fuel consumption and performance.The factors which have the greatest inu-ence on fuel consumption are primarily:driveline combination, height of trailer orsuperstructure, use of air fairings, tire type,number of wheels, gross vehicle weight,and accessories.

Page 243: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 243/352

238 Fuel Economy Driving

Driveline CombinationEngine, transmission and nal drive mustbe selected in such a way that the enginecan operate within the economic speedrange at normal driving speed. This range isdened as where the engine makes the bestuse of the energy content of the diesel fuel.

A poorly selected rear axle ratio, which re-sults in the engine speed being constantlyabove the optimum speed, will increasefuel consumption.

Superstructure and Air Fairings

The frontal area of the vehicle andtrailer/superstructure is what pushes the airaside. The smoother the transition betweenthe aerodynamic front and cab to thetrailer/superstructure, the better the airow.With better airow, the engine has to pro-duce less power to push the air to the side,especially at higher speeds.

There are partial and full air fairing pack-

ages available that should cover mostvehicle specications and applications.With atbed trailers using tarpaulins tocover the load, make sure the cover is tieddown well and presents a smooth surface.

TiresHeavy duty treaded tires increase rollingresistance considerably. For long haul,choose a smoother, ribbed type tire. Choose

a lugged type tire only when the addedtraction in mud and snow is needed.

The number of wheels (axles) has a directeffect on the rolling resistance and, thereby,the fuel consumption. For volume and/orlow weight transports, the use of a 4x2 in-stead of a 6x4 should be considered.

Page 244: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 244/352

Fuel Economy Driving 239

Gross Vehicle WeightThe gross vehicle weight of a vehicle com-bination has a large impact on the rollingresistance.

AccessoriesAs a rule, accessories such as roof rack, ad-vertising signs, bug screens, exposed airhorns, etc., have a negative effect on fuelconsumption.

Service and MaintenanceA modern heavy-duty vehicle requires reg-ular and preventive maintenance to ensurethat all its components function as theyshould. Use the recommended preventivemaintenance (PM) program that VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. has developedfor the vehicles. This ensures optimal en-ergy efciency from all components thatare important to fuel consumption.

TiresIf the tire pressure is too low, the rollingresistance increases and, thereby, increasesthe fuel consumption. The overall economyis also affected as tire wear increasesconsiderably.

BrakesDragging brakes increase fuel consumption.They should be checked regularly. It is im-portant that the release action of the airvalves is fast and that the moving parts of the wheel brakes are checked for good ad- justment and operation.

Page 245: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 245/352

240 Fuel Economy Driving

AxlesAn axle out of alignment will increaserolling resistance. Regularly check the frontwheel alignment and axles on both the trac-tor and trailer/semi-trailer. If they arecorrect, there will be less rolling resistance,and therefore, lower fuel consumption.

A good sign of an axle or wheel out of alignment is uneven tire wear. Check thetires often.

EngineFaulty or incorrectly adjusted engine com-ponents increase fuel consumption. The listbelow gives some typical components thatcan inuence fuel consumption:

• Blocked (on the outside) charge aircooler/radiator package

• Faulty thermostats• Blocked fuel lter• Blocked air intake lter• Faulty injectors• Dirty turbo charger

• Air in fuel system• Faulty fuel supply pump• Faulty fuel relief valve• Faulty fan thermostat/clutch

Page 246: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 246/352

Fuel Economy Driving 241

External EnvironmentUnder unfavorable conditions, the externalenvironment can have a negative effect onfuel consumption. This can be broken downinto two main groups: weather and wind,and the nature of the roads. Rain, snow, icyconditions and headwinds have a large neg-ative impact on fuel economy, as do hillyroads and uneven road surfaces.

HeadwindsHeadwinds have a large negative impact onfuel consumption. With tailwinds, fuel sav-ing is only marginal.

Air TemperatureLow ambient temperature contributes to in-creased fuel consumption.

Rain, Snow and Road SurfaceA wet road surface increases rolling resis-tance and, thereby, fuel consumption. Slushwill increase consumption even more. Incertain cases, the surface structure of theroad can also have a negative effect on fuelconsumption.

GradientsA hilly road with many bends demands a

higher output from the engine. The differ-ence between at, straight roads and hilly,winding roads can amount to as much as a50 percent increase in fuel consumption.

When choosing your route, avoid hills,rough roads and frequent stops. See tablewith fuel consumption for the D12C 465US00 with gross combined weight of 80,000 lb (40 t or 36.3 metric ton).

Maximum

Acceleration

Fuel

Consumption0-45 mph(70 Km/h)

0.45 quarts(0.5 liters)

0-65 mph(105 Km/h)

1.0 quarts(1.1 liters)

Page 247: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 247/352

242 Fuel Economy Driving

Driving HabitsThe way in which a vehicle is being drivenis the one factor which has the greatest in-

uence on fuel consumption. Correctdriving saves fuel and reduces vehicle wear.To achieve optimal running economy, thedriver should always remember to:

• Start the engine correctly (especiallyimportant in winter season)

• Maintain an even and correct speed• Keep the engine at its optimum speed

range• Use the correct uphill and downhill

driving technique.

Starting the EngineStart the engine according to the instruc-

tions in the Operator’s Manual of theengine manufacturer (for a Volvo engine,see page 245). A proper start, especiallyduring the cold season, saves fuel and re-duces engine wear.

Sluggish lube oil in the engine makes coldstarting more difcult. Therefore, it is im-portant to always use engine oil with thecorrect viscosity. (For the sake of the over-all fuel economy, it is also important to

have the right viscosity of transmission andrear axle oils).

Page 248: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 248/352

Fuel Economy Driving 243

Avoid High Engine SpeedsHigh engine speeds mean high fuel con-sumption. Jerky driving also increases fuelconsumption when the vehicle is constantlyaccelerated and slowed down. Avoid ahigher consumption by steady, even driving.

Refer to each engine manufacturer’s opera-tor’s manual for information on theengine’s optimum operating range.

Hill Driving TechniqueUse the inertia of the vehicle to go over thecrest of a hill under reduced power. Usegravity to help with acceleration when go-ing down the hill. Build up speed beforereaching the next uphill.

High SpeedWith increasing speed comes an increasingwind resistance that negatively affects fuelconsumption.

Page 249: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 249/352

244 Engine Start and Operation

Starting the EngineStart ProcedureNOTE! For cold weather starting, see page249.

These starting and operating proceduresshould be followed for all engines. Formore detailed information about design andfunction on a non-Volvo engine, read theOperator’s Manual from the engine manu-facturer.

NOTE! Before starting the engine, see“Instruments and Controls” (starting onpage 70) for detailed information on howthe gauges and telltales work.

Do not use ether or similar starting aidsin a Volvo or other engine with a pre-heater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether or

other combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a re or explosion,resulting in severe property damage, se-vere personal injury or death.

Never operate the starter without rstplacing the transmission in neutral ordepressing the clutch pedal. Failure tofollow these instructions may result inthe sudden movement of the vehicle re-sulting in property damage, personalinjury or death.

W0001484

Page 250: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 250/352

Engine Start and Operation 245

1 Before starting the engine, perform theengine pre-trip inspection and dailymaintenance checks in “Pre-Trip In-spection and Daily Maintenance”starting on page 32.

2 Make sure the parking brakes are en-gaged.

3 Place the transmission in neutral ordepress the clutch pedal.

4

CAUTIONDo not crank the engine for morethan 30 seconds at a time; wait twominutes after each try to allow thestarter to cool. Failure to followthese instructions could causestarter damage.

NOTE! Some starters are equippedwith an optional thermostat. If over-cranking occurs, the thermostat breaksthe electrical circuit to the starter mo-tor until the motor has cooled.

Turn on the ignition with the switchkey (see page 248 for ignition switchinformation). Some telltales will lightup in a routine check that shows thatbulbs and systems are OK. The1 INFO and 1 STOP telltales willstay on between 3 to 10 seconds.

If any of the telltales stay lit, thatfunction of the vehicle may not be op-erable. Do not operate the vehicle untilthe problem is repaired.

W3000753

Page 251: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 251/352

246 Engine Start and Operation

5 Turn the key on to the start position.Release key as soon as the engine hasstarted. For the Volvo engine, the pre-heater can be engaged to help startingin cold temperatures. For switch func-tion, see page 248.

6

CAUTIONIf at start-up, or thereafter, the oilpressure gauge indicates any dropin oil pressure, the engine must beshut down immediately. Failure tostop the engine may cause majorengine damage.

When the engine has started, it takes awhile to send lubricating oil to allbearings and shafts, and between pis-tons and liners. Wait for the oilpressure gauge to settle at a normallevel, then bring engine speed up grad-ually. Increase speed as it warms up.

Check all gauges during warm-up.7 During warm-up, apply load gradually

until the oil temperature reaches 140 F(60 C). To start a loaded vehicle, theminimum coolant temperature must beapproximately 120 F (50 C).

W3000902

Page 252: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 252/352

Engine Start and Operation 247

Stopping the EngineAllow the engine to slow down and idle for3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off. Thisallows the turbo to slow down and thecooling system to dissipate the engine heat.Switch the engine off by turning the igni-tion key to the O , or OFF, position.

CAUTIONShutting off an engine immediately afterhigh speed or full load operation candamage the turbo and cause heat stressin the engine. Always let the engine idle

for 3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off.

Page 253: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 253/352

248 Engine Start and Operation

Ignition SwitchThe ignition switch is located on the rightside of the steering column just under thesteering wheel. Standard equipment is anormal ignition switch.

A steering wheel lock is available as an op-tion. When the key is removed it actuates adetente pin that prevents the steering shaftfrom turning.

NOTE! The vehicle is delivered with 2identical keys. If more keys are needed,order them through your Volvo Truck au-thorized dealer. The keys are laser cutand require a special machine for copy-ing, available through your Volvo Truckdealer. Record the key code and keep ina secure place. A new key can be made,using the key code, if the keys are lost.

W3000976

The ignition positions are:

O Off

I Radio, Accessories

II Drive

II 1/2 Preheat (Volvo engine only)

III Start

The ignition switch has a restart inhibitor

locking out the start position after one try,which means that the key must be turnedback to O before a new attempt at startingcan be made.

The key can only be removed when in theO or Off position.

For full starting instructions, see page 245.

W3001302

Page 254: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 254/352

Engine Start and Operation 249

Cold Weather Start and OperationVolvo Engine Cold StartNOTE! These cold start instructions are forVolvo engines only. For other enginemakes, see the manufacturer’s handbook.

Do not use ether or similar starting aidsin a Volvo or other engine with a pre-heater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether or

other combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a re or explosion,resulting in severe property damage, se-vere personal injury or death.

NOTE! Volvo engines have a unique coldstart feature. Depending on the ambienttemperature, the engine cranks two to fourturns without injecting fuel. This providescleaner combustion at start-up and pro-motes longer engine life.

To avoid excessive exhaust smoke whenstarting a cold engine, the intake air shouldbe warmed up by using the preheater.

Turn the ignition key to the preheat posi-tion and hold momentarily to engage thepreheater. It remains engaged and will lightthe preheater telltale between 0 and 50 sec-onds, depending on the engine coolanttemperature.

T3008841

Page 255: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 255/352

250 Engine Start and Operation

CoolantTemperature

PreheaterEngagement

Time (seconds)

Above +120 F (50 C) 0

Above +50 F (10 C) 0

Between +4 F (-15 C)and +50 F (10 C)

25 ± 2 to 50 ± 2

Below +4 F (-15 C) 50

When the engine has started, the preheatermay be re-engaged to assist in faster enginewarm-up. To re-engage, turn the key to the

preheat position and the preheater will en-gage. The starter will not engage as thestart position is locked out.

Engines Without Preheater

Engines not equipped may, depending oncoolant temperature, take longer to start. If this should happen, do not release the igni-tion key until the engine has started (whilestill observing the 30 second maximum

cranking time).

Page 256: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 256/352

Engine Start and Operation 251

Ether Start

Do not use ether or similar starting aidsin a Volvo or other engine with a pre-heater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether orother combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a re or explosion,resulting in severe property damage, se-vere personal injury or death.

Do not breathe the ether fumes. Breath-ing ether fumes could result in personalinjury or death.

If using a cold start system, make sureto read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions regarding its use, handling andstorage. Many starting uids are sold incapsules or pressure cans and improperusage can be dangerous, resulting in ex-plosion, personal injury or death.

Ether allows combustion with lower cylin-der temperatures. A hand-held spray can forinjecting ether through the engine air intakesystem will usually provide quick startingto as low as –10 F (-23 C). Below this tem-perature, a permanently installed system forinjecting a combustible vapor directly intothe intake manifold is necessary.

Only inject ether vapors when the engine iscranking. Use it sparingly! Excessive etheruse can cause piston and ring damage.

W0001484

Page 257: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 257/352

252 Engine Start and Operation

Cold Weather OperationIf the engine is in good mechanical condi-tion and the necessary preparations aretaken for cold weather operation, ordinarycold weather will not cause difculty instarting or loss of efciency.

Cold weather operation does requirechanges in operating practices, maintenanceprocedures, lubrication and fuel. Additionsto the vehicle, such as heated fuel lters,fuel tank heater, engine block heater, win-terfront, etc. can make winter operationeasier. Contact your Volvo Truck dealer for

the correct accessories and informationabout installation.

If satisfactory engine temperature is notmaintained, increased engine wear willresult in higher maintenance cost. Acces-sories should be designed to be easilydisconnected when switching to driving inwarmer weather so they do not affect theoperation of the engine.

For cold weather operation follow theserecommendations:

• When starting the engine in tempera-tures below 32 F (0 C), use enginelubricants of lower viscosity. See the“Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and Engine ” for more information.

• When the temperature is below freez-ing, make sure the concentration of

antifreeze in the coolant is sufcient toprevent freezing. See “ Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and Engine ” formore information.

Page 258: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 258/352

Engine Start and Operation 253

• During cold weather, give more atten-tion to the condition of the batteries.Test them frequently to ensure suf-cient power for starting. A deadbattery may freeze.

• Fuel cloud point is the temperature atwhich wax crystals become visible,which is generally above the pourpoint of the fuel. To keep the fuel l-ter elements from plugging with waxcrystals, the cloud point should be nohigher than the lowest ambient temper-ature at which the engine must start.

To prevent wear and possible damage to theengine when it is cold, gradually bring it upto operating temperature before operating athigh engine speeds or full load. After start-ing and before moving the vehicle, run theengine at 800 to 1000 r/min for 3 to 5 min-utes. Operate at partial engine load until thecoolant temperature reaches 165 F (75 C).

Engine Block Heater (option)An electric engine block heater can be in-stalled for keeping the coolant hot when thevehicle is parked. The heater is mountedthrough the side of the engine block withthe heater coils in the coolant jacket. Theheater does not interfere with normal oper-ation and can be permanently installed.

The heater runs on 120 V and has an easilyaccessible plug, located under the driverside door. The plug will hook up to a nor-mal extension cable.

W3001995

Page 259: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 259/352

254 Engine Start and Operation

Oil Pan Heater (option)Oil pan heaters aid low temperature startingby improving oil ow to critical parts inthe engine. This helps prevent engine wear.They are similar to block heaters and arewired into the same plug as the enginecoolant heater.

Fuel Heater Filter (option)If running in very cold weather, a heatedfuel lter should be added. A number of different fuel heaters are available as op-tions. They are electrically heated andregulated by a thermostat. They are typi-

cally built into the primary fuel lterhousing.

W2001067

Fuel Tank Heater (option)An in-tank fuel heater is also available. In-tank heaters use hot engine coolant towarm the fuel. This prevents wax formationin the fuel during cold season operation.These heaters are thermostatically con-trolled and will automatically raise the fueltemperature to an optimum level.

Page 260: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 260/352

Engine Start and Operation 255

WinterfrontVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. does notrecommend the use of winterfronts, shuttersor any other shield in front of the grille orradiator package under normal circum-stances.

Today’s electronically controlled enginesare designed to operate in cold tempera-tures without a winterfront. These devices,if not used properly, can cause higher ex-haust temperatures, power loss, excessivefan usage, failure of the charge-air-coolerand a reduction in fuel economy.

Winterfronts are properly used in the win-tertime during very cold weather withsustained temperatures below -15 F(-25 C). In these cases, coolant and inletmanifold temperatures must also be care-fully monitored and controlled.

CAUTIONFailure to remove the winterfront when

temperatures go above -15

F (-25

C)could cause severe damage to engine,charge-air-cooler and/or loss of fueleconomy.

If a winterfront is used, it must conform tothese specications:

• The grille coverage should be suchthat airow through to the charge-air-cooler is at a uniform rate over theentire area. This means that a single,small opening in the winterfront is notacceptable.

• Air passage must be distributed evenlyacross the grille and no more than85% can be covered.

Please see your local Volvo Trucks dealerfor Volvo recommended winterfronts.

NOTE! If there is engine or related dam-age that can be traced to an improperlyused winterfront, the warranty is no longervalid for those parts.

Page 261: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 261/352

256 Engine Start and Operation

Engine OperationGeneralProper operation, driving techniques andmaintenance are key factors in obtainingthe maximum life and economy from amodern turbocharged diesel engine. Thissection has operational information aboutthe components that make up the engine.For the best operation economy, see “FuelEconomy” page 237.

When changing gears, avoid lugging toextend engine life. When the engine is op-erating at full throttle and maximumgoverned speed cannot be reached or main-tained, the engine is lugging . Whenapproaching a hill requiring more power, itis necessary to downshift the transmissionas the vehicle goes into the grade. Acceler-ating to the governed engine speed willgive additional power at approximately thesame road speed. For shifting instructions,see the transmission manufacturer’s Opera-tor’s Manual.

Always start moving the load in a gear lowenough so that the engine can be acceler-ated to the governed speed. Then shift tothe next gear as the engine decelerates. Forloaded vehicles, do not skip a gear or lugthe engine while getting up to cruisingspeed. For empty or light loads, it is per-missible to skip gears.

When operating on a level highway or atcruising speed, hold the engine speed at ap-proximately 75 to 85 percent of governedspeed (1400 to 1600 r/min for large dis-placement engines) to achieve power andeconomical fuel consumption.

Page 262: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 262/352

Engine Start and Operation 257

The operator should understand the operat-ing characteristics of the engine the vehicleis equipped with. Modern diesel engineshave maximum torques at much lower en-gine speeds than in the past. As such, theseengines are designed to perform satisfacto-rily at a lower speed. New transmissionswith wide ratio steps between gears de-mand the use of these engines.

Excessive exhaust smoke may be due to thetype of fuel used, a restricted air cleaner, amalfunctioning fuel system or the way thevehicle is operated. Shift gears and increaseor decrease the engine speed as necessary

to obtain the engine speed/transmissiongear combination which will prevent smok-ing. Excessive smoke indicates wasted fuelwhich creates carbon deposits in the engineand turbocharger. This causes excessive en-gine wear and oil consumption. Excessivesmoke not only pollutes the atmosphere butcan also cause shortened exhaust systemlife.

Engine Break-InEngines used in the VN-series are run ondynamometers before being shipped fromthe manufacturer. In most applications, theengine can be put to work immediately, butthe operator should be extra observant of the operating conditions shown on thegauges during the initial 100 hours or 3000miles (5000 km).

A more frequent check of the engine com-partment for uid leaks, uid levels andfastener tightness is also recommended dur-ing the initial period.

Page 263: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 263/352

258 Engine Start and Operation

Engine Shut-Down System

Failure to take the necessary precautionswhen the 1 INFO or 1 STOP telltalesare on, can ultimately result in automaticengine shut-down and the loss of powersteering. Vehicle crash can occur.

The engine shut-down system will automat-ically derate or stop the engine when oneor more of the systems listed below reachesa critical stage:

• High Coolant Temperature

• Low Oil Pressure

• Low Coolant Level

Derate and shut-down functions may be ap-plied differently, or added to, depending onthe engine manufacturer. See the engine op-erator’s manual for more information.

When the shut-down is activated, thetelltales come on and the buzzer is also ac-tivated. From that time it will take 30seconds before the engine shuts down. Inthis time period, nd a safe place to pulloff of the road.

After the engine has been shut down by thesystem, the override will allow a restart of the engine for a period of 30 seconds. Thisis so that the vehicle may be pulled off of

the road, if necessary. The alarm will re-main activated until repairs have been madeto correct the problem.

CAUTIONThe operator should not continuallyoverride the system as this can cause se-rious damage to the vehicle’s engine.

T3008861

T3008860

Page 264: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 264/352

Engine Start and Operation 259

Engine OverspeedThis vehicle is equipped with a diesel en-gine and should not be operated in an areawith a concentration of hydrocarbon vapors(for example gasoline or diesel fuel fumes).Be especially cautious of low-lying orclosed-in areas. The vapors may be drawninto the engine through the air intake andcause the engine to overspeed. Hot carbonand other sparks may come from the ex-haust system, and cause an explosion andre.

If the vehicle is in an area where hydrocar-

bon vapors may be present, shut the engineoff immediately if any abnormalities areexperienced. Do not leave it unattended.

The diesel engine will operate on anyfuel which enters the cylinder, whether itis from the injectors or from the air in-take system. Therefore, if any solvent isused to ush out the air cleaner element,the engine may overspeed duringstart-up. Engine damage and severeinjury and/or death from burns or explo-sion can occur.

Do not use ether or similar starting aids

in a Volvo or other engine with . TheVolvo engine is equipped with a pre-heater. Introduction of ether or othercombustible material in the intake mani-fold could cause a re or explosion,resulting in severe property damage, se-vere personal injury or death.

W0001484

Page 265: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 265/352

260 Engine Start and Operation

IdlingAll engines in the VN models are electroni-cally governed engines. The idle speed ispre-programmed from the manufacturer.Low idle speed is adjustable within certainlimits (for most engines between 600 to 750r/min). See page 261 for more information.

The common belief that idling a diesel en-gine causes no engine damage is wrong.Idling produces sulfuric acid, which breaksdown the oil and eats into bearings, rings,valve stems and engine surfaces.

NOTE! Avoid excessive idling. If the vehi-cle is parked for more than 5 minutes, stopthe engine. An engine can burn from 0.75to 1.5 gallons (3 to 5.5 liters) of fuel perhour while idling. During long engineidling periods, the engine coolant tempera-ture may fall below the normal operatingrange*. Incomplete combustion of fuel dur-ing the warm-up period can cause dilutionof the oil in the crankcase, formation of lacquer or gummy deposits on the valves,pistons and rings, and rapid accumulation

of sludge in the engine.

*The Volvo engines are equipped with awarmholding device (EPG = Exhaust Pres-sure Governor) to keep engine at normaloperating temperature to prevent incom-plete combustion, even at idle.

Page 266: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 266/352

Engine Start and Operation 261

Low Idle AdjustmentIf the engine coolant temperature is above122 F (50 C), the vehicle is stationary (en-gine running; accelerator released; parkingbrake on) and the PTO is not engaged, theengine low idle speed can be adjusted withthe use of the cruise control function.

1 Set the cruise control switch to theON position.

2 Depress the foot brake pedal. Hold itdown during the entire procedure.

3 Move the cruise control switch to theRESUME position and hold it therefor four seconds. Release the switch.The engine speed will drop to the de-fault low idle.

4 The idle speed is adjusted up with theSET+ switch. Each time the SET+switch is pressed momentarily, idlespeed will increase approx. 10 r/min(the speed cannot be increased abovethe maximum allowed by the enginemanufacturer).

5 The idle speed is adjusted down withthe SET- switch. Each time the SET-switch is pressed momentarily, the idlespeed will decrease approx. 10 r/min.(the speed cannot be adjusted belowthe low idle set by the engine manu-facturer). By continuously pressing theswitch, engine speed will ramp up(SET+) or down (SET-).

6 When the desired engine idle speed isreached, push and hold the SET andmove the cruise control switch to theRESUME position at the same timeand hold them in position for four sec-onds. Release the switches.

7 Release the brake pedal to set the newidle speed. If an error was made dur-ing the adjustment procedure, thedefault idle speed will be maintained.

W3002499

Before setting the idle, apply the parking

brakes and place the transmission inneutral. Failure to do so can result in un-expected vehicle movement and cancause personal injury or death.

Page 267: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 267/352

262 Engine Start and Operation

Idle Shutdown Timer

Volvo 1 to 40 minutes

Cummins 1 to 100 minutes

Detroit 2 to 100 minutes

•Vehicle speed is 0.

• Engine is running at idle speed.

• Coolant temperature is above113 F (45 C).

• Parking brake is applied.

The idle shutdown timer can be programmedto shut down the engine

The permitted idle time can be set to thefollowing time interval:

When the idle shutdown feature is enabled,the engine will shut down at the set timeunder the following conditions:

These are the standard choices when thevehicle is delivered. For more informationabout other customer adaptation choices,contact your Volvo Truck dealer.

after a specific engineidling time. This programming cannot be changedby the operator; however, it can be changed usingspecial tools. For vehicles equipped with Volvoengines, use VCADS Elite software application; forvehicles equipped with Cummins engines, use thePro-Link tool. See your local Volvo Truck dealerfor details.

Page 268: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 268/352

Engine Start and Operation 263

Uphill OperationFor best performance, allow engine speedto reach the bottom of the rated torquerange before downshifting. Continue todownshift in this manner until a gear isreached that will maintain the desiredspeed. Continue to operate at the ratedtorque if the vehicle will make it to the topwithout a downshift. Begin upshifting asthe grade of the hill decreases and the en-gine begins to accelerate above 1600 r/min.Driving this way will give the best fueleconomy and performance.

NOTE! Allowing the engine to lug downto the end of maximum torque range is per-missible if the vehicle is cresting the top of a hill. However, extended operation at en-gine speeds below the maximum torquerange (usually 1100 to 1200 r/min) willraise exhaust temperature and cylinder pres-sure. This can lead to reduced engine life.

Downhill Operation

CAUTION

Do not exceed engine manufacturer’srecommended maximum engine speed.Engine damage can occur. If equippedwith an engine or exhaust brake, do notexceed 2300 r/min.

On a downgrade, do not coast with theclutch pedal depressed or the transmissionin neutral. Select a gear that does not allowthe engine speed to exceed the enginemanufacturer’s maximum engine speed rec-ommendation. Use the engine or exhaustbrake and/or the service brakes to controlthe vehicle speed. A simple rule is to selectthe same gear used to go up the grade.

Page 269: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 269/352

264 Engine Start and Operation

High Altitude OperationEngines lose power when operated at highaltitude because the air is too thin to allowburning as much fuel as at sea level. Fornaturally aspirated engines, this loss isabout 3 percent per 1000 feet (300 m) in-crease in altitude above sea level. Mostturbocharged engines are rated for higheraltitudes and will not lose as much poweras a naturally aspirated engine.

An engine will produce excessive exhaustsmoke at high altitude unless a lower gearis used. Shift gears as needed to avoid ex-cessive exhaust smoke.

Closely monitor the gauges during high al-titude operation. The thinner ambient airreduces the efciency of the engine coolingsystem. Engine overheat or cylinder dam-age could occur if the engine is operated atfull load for extended periods at high alti-tudes in hot weather. Downshift and reducevehicle speed to reduce engine load whendriving on long grades in these conditions.This will help keep engine air intake mani-

fold and coolant temperatures within safelimits.

Page 270: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 270/352

Engine Start and Operation 265

Cruise Control

Do not use the cruise control in heavytrafc, with ice/snow on the road or dur-ing other unfavorable conditions. Thismay lead to a loss of vehicle control,causing a vehicle crash and can result inpersonal injury or death.

EngagingThe cruise control switches are located onthe turn signal lever.

To engage and set desired speed:

1 Set the cruise control switch to ON.

2 When the desired vehicle speed hasbeen reached, momentarily press inthe SET+ or SET- switch on the endof the lever.

3 If the speed needs to be increased,

press the SET+ switch. The vehiclespeed will increase as long as theSET+ switch is pressed (speed will notincrease above the maximum pro-grammed speed). Release when thedesired speed has been reached.

4 If the speed needs to be decreased,press the SET- switch. The vehiclespeed will decrease as long as theSET- switch is pressed (speed will notdecrease below the minimum pro-grammed speed). Release when thedesired speed has been reached.

NOTE! The cruise control cannot be en-gaged at speeds below approximately30 mph (45 km/h) and engine speed belowapproximately 1,000 r/min.

W3002499

Page 271: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 271/352

266 Engine Start and Operation

DisengagingThe cruise control is disengaged if thebrake or clutch pedal is depressed, or if thecruise control switch is set to OFF. If theignition key is turned back to the acces-sories position (R), the cruise controlsystem will automatically be disengaged.

Resuming Vehicle SpeedThe previously selected cruise speed is re-tained in the memory. When the cruisecontrol switch is pushed to the RESUME

position, the vehicle resumes the previouslyset speed (providing vehicle speed is ex-ceeding approximately 10 mph (15 km/h)when the switch is pressed).

AccelerationMomentary acceleration (such as for over-taking another vehicle) does not interruptcruise control operation. After overtaking,

release accelerator and let the vehicle slowto cruise control speed. The previously setspeed will then be maintained without hav-ing to set the switch to RESUME.

Page 272: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 272/352

Engine Start and Operation 267

Fuel Tank Cap(s)

Do not remove the fuel tank cap near anopen ame. Diesel fuel vapors are com-bustible and can cause an explosion orre, resulting in severe personal injuryor death.

Some fuel tank caps have a pressure and athermal relief function built into the cap.These functions are designed to avoid fuelspills in the event of an accident. The pres-

sure relief function of the safety ventingsystem has a crack pressure high enough toretain fuel in the tank regardless of the ori-entation of the vehicle (5 to 8 psi).

The thermal relief feature is large enoughto limit tank pressure to a safe level evenwhen the remaining fuel is boiling in thetank, but not so large as to dump fuel un-necessarily. The thermal relief shouldrespond as much as possible to fuel tem-perature rather than ame temperature.

These features are also available on the op-tional lockable fuel tank cap.

WARNINGOnly replace the cap with a cap contain-ing the same features described above.Unnecessary fuel spills leading to in-creased re hazard may be the result of using a cap without the pressure andthermal relief mechanisms.

In the case the cap is lost, it must be re-placed with a cap containing the samefeatures.

W2003143

W2003144

Page 273: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 273/352

268 Engine Start and Operation

FuelingAir is always present inside the fuel tanks,entering mainly through the tank ventila-tion. With the air being heated up and

cooled down, condensation is formed andwater is mixed in the fuel. To avoid con-densation when the vehicle is parked forlonger periods, ll the tanks up to 95% of capacity. Do not ll more than that, as thefuel needs to have room for expansion dur-ing the heat of the day.

Do not carry extra fuel containers in thecab. Fuel containers, full or empty, mayleak, explode or give added fuel to are. Failure to follow this precautionmay lead to a re and serious personalinjury or death.

Do not smoke while fueling the vehicle.The glow from the cigarette can ignitethe diesel fuel, causing an explosion re-sulting in serious personal injury ordeath.

Page 274: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 274/352

Clutch and Transmission 269

ClutchGeneral

Before starting the engine, set the park-ing brakes and place the transmission inneutral. Failure to do so can result in un-expected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury and death.

Do not allow the clutch to slip excessively.This would cause excessive heat to be gen-erated and the clutch will be damaged andbring on premature failure. As soon as thevehicle is moving, remove the foot fromthe pedal for complete clutch engagement.Once the clutch is fully engaged, heat andwear does not affect it.

Do not shock load the drive line throughrapid engagement of the clutch. Extremecare should be taken when driving heavy

loads up hills. Always use the lowest gearwhen starting out under adverse conditions.

When operating a vehicle equipped with aclutch brake, the clutch pedal should not bedepressed more than halfway to the oorwhile shifting, except when the vehicle isat a stop. To re-enter the low gear fromneutral or reverse, or to enter reverse gearfrom neutral or low, the clutch should bedepressed all the way to engage the clutch

brake. This stops the rotation of the trans-mission input shaft and provides an easy,quiet gear engagement.

W4000760

Page 275: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 275/352

270 Clutch and Transmission

Folding Gear Lever (option)Releasing Gear LeverTo fold the gear lever, follow this proce-dure:

Before releasing the gear lever, applythe parking brakes and shut down theengine. Failure to do so can result in un-expected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

• Make sure the parking brakes are set• To release the gear lever, pull the lever

in toward the seat and press on theknob downward in a straight line.

W4001388

• Twist the lever counterclockwise whileholding pressure on the knob. Whenreleasing the pressure, thespringloaded lever will be pushed upout of the locked position.

W4001389

Page 276: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 276/352

Clutch and Transmission 271

• Lift and fold the gear lever straightback, parallel with the seat. It willcome to rest in the folded position.

NOTE! If the lever is not movedstraight back, it may not be able totravel the full distance.

W4001390

Locking Gear LeverTo lock the gear lever in place, move itfrom the folded position forward until it isupright. Press down on the knob and twistclockwise until the knob is lined up straight.

Make sure that the gear lever is securelylocked in position before taking the ve-hicle on the road. Failure to do so cancause loss of control over the vehicle,leading to an accident with serious per-sonal injury or death.

Page 277: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 277/352

272 Brakes

BrakesBrake Safety Information

Do not inspect or adjust parts or compo-nents in the brake system without settingthe parking brake, placing the transmis-sion in neutral and securely chocking thewheels. If the vehicle is not secured toprevent uncontrolled vehicle movement,it could roll and cause severe personal

injury or death.

Do not use replacement parts anywherein the brake system unless it conformsexactly to original specications. A non-conforming part in your vehicle’s brakesystem could cause a malfunction, lead-ing to loss of control of the vehicle

resulting in severe personal injury ordeath.

Do not ride the brakes going down steephills. The brakes could overheat and losetheir effectiveness. Always choose a lowgear before going down the grade andreduce speed to help control vehiclespeed. Losing the brakes going downhillcan lead to an accident causing seriouspersonal injury or death.

Do not operate the vehicle when there isa malfunction in the compressed air sys-tem. An air brake system with leaks orother malfunctions may prevent thebrake system from operating properly.The vehicle should not be operated untilthe system is repaired and all brake cir-

cuits are working properly. Failure torepair the system can lead to loss of control of the vehicle resulting in severepersonal injury or death.

The brake system is a critical vehiclesafety system. For your safety and forthose around you, follow the recom-

mended preventive maintenance checks.If any problems occur, have them inves-tigated immediately by an authorizedservice facility. Failure to properly main-tain the brake system can result incompromised brake efciency and maylead to loss of control of the vehicle re-sulting in severe personal injury or death.

Do not drive through deep water. Thebrake system can be affected so thebraking efciency is less or the brakespull the vehicle to the side. This couldlead to an accident leading to seriouspersonal injury or death.

Page 278: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 278/352

Brakes 273

Do not release the parking brake or at-tempt to move the vehicle until brake airpressure in both circuits is at least 100psi (690 kPa). Failure to follow this pro-cedure may lead to uncontrolled vehiclemovement and cause severe personal in- jury or death.

Never release or drive a truck that has abrake discrepancy — no matter how mi-nor — until it has been repaired orcorrected. Failure to repair brake dis-crepancies can result in compromisedbrake efciency and may lead to loss of control of the vehicle resulting in severepersonal injury or death.

GeneralAll Volvo vehicles are designed to meet orexceed all applicable federal brake stan-

dards and regulations. They use a dualcircuit, compressed air system. It consistsof two independent brake systems that usea single set of brake controls. Each circuitis supplied by its own compressed air tank.Both air tanks receive compressed air fromthe same supply tank (wet tank) and arecharged with equal pressure. The two cir-cuits are interconnected for the parkingbrake system.

Air pressures in the two circuits are moni-tored by two pressure gauges on the rightside of the instrument cluster. The primary(rear) brake circuit gauge is marked with an“R” within a symbol and the secondary(front) brake circuit gauge is marked withan “F” within a symbol. The two pointersshould register equal or nearly equal pres-sure. By observing the gauge pointers, theoperator is forewarned in the event of apressure drop in either or both of the cir-cuits. See page 91 for more information.

Before operating the vehicle, check the airgauges which indicate air pressure. Theyshould not register less than 105 psi(725 kPa). Maximum pressure at any timeshould not exceed 150 psi (1035 kPa).

W3003637

Page 279: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 279/352

274 Brakes

Both circuits are piped into a dual brakevalve, which simultaneously applies frontand rear axle service brakes during eachbrake application. In the event of a failurein either one of the circuits, the other cir-cuit becomes the emergency circuit forapplying the brakes.

W5000923

The Master Warning Telltale and buzzeralerts of a dangerous situation. Air pres-sure is low and the remaining air volumemay not be enough for repeated braking.The emergency brakes may engage,causing a wheel lock-up, loss of vehiclecontrol and become a hazard to follow-ing vehicles. Bring the vehicle to acontroled stop. Failure to follow these

precautions can result in loss of brakingcontrol and serious personal injury ordeath can occur as a result of a vehicleaccident.

An important feature of the brake system isthat an automatic spring brake applicationdoes not take place as a result of an air lossin only one of the two circuits. In this case,brake control remains in the foot brakevalve. In each air pressure gauge, there is awarning light connected to a low pressureswitch that comes on if air pressure goesbelow 60 psi (420 kPa). At the same time,the buzzer will sound and the main warningtelltale will come on. This pressure dropwarns the operator to make a manual emer-gency stop before an automatic emergencystop is made.

W3000638

Master Warning Telltale

Page 280: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 280/352

Brakes 275

Brake System ControlsThe air compressor, governor, pressure reg-ulator valve and reservoirs are controldevices. Their function is to build up,maintain and control air pressure in thereservoirs. This is so that pressure is heldconstant between the minimum and maxi-mum range established for air brakeoperation.

The brake valve, quick release valve, brakechambers and slack adjusters are applica-tion devices. They distribute the airpressure and convert its energy into the me-

chanical force necessary to apply or releasethe brakes.

Foot Brake ValveThe foot brake valve is directly connectedto the brake pedal. The valve gives a pro-

gressive output against the pedal travel.This allows better control of the pressure inthe rst half of the pedal travel. In the lasthalf of the pedal travel, the pressure outputincrease is faster.

The foot brake valve applies the servicebrakes, incorporating both the primary andsecondary air systems. The primary systemcontrols the rear brakes and the secondarysystem controls the front brakes. The footbrake valve receives air from the com-pressed air tanks. Air pressure is thendelivered to the wheel brake chambers asrequired by the amount of pressure exertedon the foot brake pedal. The brake chamberforce then applies the wheel brakes.

W5000920

Page 281: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 281/352

276 Brakes

From the operator’s viewpoint, operatingthe foot brake valve of a vehicle equippedwith air brakes differs very little from theoperation of a conventionally braked vehi-cle. Because the operation of the brakepedal requires scarcely more effort than de-pressing the average throttle pedal, airbrakes are naturally much easier to control.If the driver gives full attention to the fol-lowing suggestions, a little experience willmake him/her thoroughly familiar with theair-controlled braking of this vehicle.

Failure to observe these precautions canresult in loss of brakes, loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle accident, and seriouspersonal injury or death.

1 The best possible stop will be madewhen the rst brake application is asrm as the speed and road conditionpermit. Then, ease off as the speed isreduced. Never apply the brakeslightly at rst and increase the pres-sure as the speed diminishes.

2 Do not fan the brake pedal. Fanninggives poor brake performance and

wastes air.

3 The air brake is designed so that whenthe brake pedal is fully depressed, anemergency application results. Thisapplication should be made only in anemergency situation.

Page 282: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 282/352

Brakes 277

4 In making a stop or a slow-down, al-low the transmission to remain in gearwith the throttle closed, disengagingthe clutch only when engine idlingspeed is reached.

5 When parking the vehicle, place thetransmission in neutral and set theparking brake before shutting downthe engine.

6 When descending a long grade, do notuse the service brakes too long or toooften. The brakes may overheat andlose their effectiveness.

7 Before descending a steep grade, thetransmission should be shifted into alower gear and the vehicle speed re-duced. Other speed retardation devicesshould also be used if available (en-gine brakes, retarders or trailer handcontrol valves).

Page 283: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 283/352

278 Brakes

Parking Brake/Trailer Supply ValvesTrucks/Tractors have two air control valveson the instrument panel:

• Trailer Supply (red octagonal knob)

• System Park (yellow diamond knob)

The two air control valves are intercon-nected and interacting. The System Park valve supplies and controls the Trailer AirSupply valve.

The System Park valve knob (yellow)should be pushed in rst, after sufcient airpressure is built up (apply foot brake to pre-vent vehicle from rolling). The Trailer AirSupply valve knob may then be pushed in.

The Trailer Air Supply valve knob and Sys-tem Park valve knob will automatically popout if the system pressure (both front andrear circuits) drops to 25 to 35 psi (170 to240 kPa). The tractor protection valve willthen close, the tractor spring brakes willapply and the trailer emergency system willbe activated.

On vehicles equipped with the standard twovalve system, the operation of one valve to-gether with the other permits the operatorto select the desired functions described be-low:

Red Valve(Trailer Air

Supply)

YellowValve (Sys-tem Park)

Function(Mode)

Out Out SystemPark

In Out TrailerCharge

In In NormalRunning

Out In Bobtail

W5000924

Page 284: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 284/352

Brakes 279

Parking Brake ReleaseVN models have engines equipped with en-gine electronic control units (EECU). Thesehave two features that may impact thebrake system. One is the anti-stall device inthe EECU which senses torque demand andautomatically controls the engine to com-pensate and maintain speed. On tractorsequipped with parking brakes on only oneaxle, the anti-stall device keeps the enginefrom stalling, allowing the driver to pullaway with the brakes dragging. This mayresult in overheated brakes and damagedwheel hubs.

WARNINGContinual dragging of the brakes willcause brakes to overheat. This may leadto wheel end re. To avoid overheating,make sure both parking brake knobs arepushed in before driving off.

W5001114

If the yellow knob is pulled out and the redknob is pushed in, a condition is createdwhere the trailer parking brakes are not ap-plied and only the single drive axle brakesare applied. In this condition, the vehiclecan be driven away. Therefore, it is veryimportant that the driver make sure the yel-low AND red knobs are pushed in all theway before driving the vehicle.

W5001116

Correct Driving Position:Both knobs fully in

Page 285: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 285/352

280 Brakes

There is also an engine shut-down devicein the EECU that shuts down the engine af-ter a pre-programmed time in order to savefuel. This is activated when the yellowparking brake knob is pulled out. There-fore, some drivers park and release theparking brakes using only the red knob tokeep the engine running. It is then easilyoverlooked that in a vehicle parked withboth the yellow and red knobs activated,only the red knob is pushed in by habit.

W5001117

Incorrect Parking orDriving Position

Page 286: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 286/352

Brakes 281

Spring Brake For Parking

Never leave the vehicle without beingcertain the parking brakes are set or thatother precautions are taken to prevent thevehicle from rolling. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury or death.

The parking brake mechanism uses springpressure as a separate power medium to ap-ply the service brakes on the driving axles.The parking brake is released by the same

compressed air source used to apply theservice brakes. Since this brake is releasedby air pressure, the system must be chargedto at least 60 psi (420 kPa) before the park-ing brake may be released.

The parking brake spring tension is suf-cient to hold a fully loaded vehicle onmaximum grades permitted on modernhighways, provided the brake drums and

linings are in good condition and the brakesare properly adjusted.

CAUTIONDo not use the spring parking brakes if the service brakes are hot, such as afterdescending a steep grade. Also, do notuse the spring parking brakes duringfreezing temperatures if the wheel

brakes are wet. To do so could damagethe brakes, if hot, or may cause them tofreeze during cold weather.

If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle inlow gear and lightly apply the brakes toheat and dry them. Allow hot brakes tocool before using the parking spring brakes.

W5000643

Page 287: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 287/352

282 Brakes

WARNINGDo not set the vehicle in motion if theparking brake is engaged. An alarm willsound if you do. Movement of the truck while the parking brake is set can causebrakes to overheat. This may lead towheel end re. To avoid overheating,make sure both parking brake knobs arepushed in before driving off.

There are several ways to determine if theparking brakes have been set. By pullingout the yellow knob:

• An audible rush of air will be heardwhen the parking brake knob is pulled.The air exhausts from the park brakevalve itself and from the spring brakechambers on the rear axle(s).

• A black ring around the base of theyellow control knob will be seen.

• There will be a uctuation in the airpressure gauge needles.

• You will not be able to pull the knobout any further.

Do not attempt in any way to disassem-ble or tamper with the spring brakechamber. The force stored in the spring,if suddenly released, can cause personalinjury or death.

Do not apply the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear wheelsmay lock up causing loss of vehicle con-trol leading to an accident with personalinjury or death.

Page 288: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 288/352

Brakes 283

Trailer Brake Hand Control

The trailer hand brake control is not aparking brake valve and must not beused as one. This brake is not designedto hold the vehicle stationary. Failure tofollow these instructions can result in theunintentional movement of the vehicleand may cause personal injury or death.

The hand control valve for the trailer

brakes engages the trailer brakes indepen-dently from the vehicle brakes. The valvecan be fully or partially engaged but in anypartial position it will be overridden by afull application of the foot brake valve.

To supply air to the trailer brakes to slowthe trailer down, pull the valve handledown. The farther the handle is pulleddown, the more air pressure is applied tothe trailer brakes. Releasing the self-

returning handle releases the trailer brakes.

W5001035

Air Tanks

WARNINGWhen draining the air tanks, do not look into the area of the draining air. Dirt orsludge particles may be in the air streamand could cause eye injury.

Air tanks should be drained daily. Makesure the drain cocks close properly afterdraining. Empty moisture from air tanks bypulling the drain valve wire. The tanksshould be checked for condensation uideven if an automatic drain valve is installed.

W5000601

Page 289: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 289/352

284 Brakes

The “121” Brake StandardThis manual refers occasionally to “121”brakes. Although some operators believe“121” only applies to vehicles equippedwith anti-lock devices, the “121” standardapplies to all vehicles that are capable of on-highway operation.

The “121” requirement also covers alter-ations or changes to parts or systemsrelated to the “121” standard once the vehi-cle has been placed in service. The ownerand operator should be aware that it is a vi-olation for any repair facility to make any

part or component inoperative when it isrequired for “121” compliance.

Charging Air To Another VehicleThere are many methods which may beused to charge the air system of another ve-hicle. Vehicles equipped with the standardtwo-valve system (trailer supply andparking brake) must use the following pro-cedure when using the emergency trailer airline as an auxiliary air source, other than tocharge the trailer air reservoirs.

Before working on a vehicle, set theparking brakes, place the transmission inneutral, and block the wheels. Failure to

do so can result in unexpected vehiclemovement and can cause serious per-sonal injury or death.

Page 290: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 290/352

Brakes 285

Antilock Braking System (ABS)The vehicle has a standard brake system,equipped with an electronic speed monitor-ing and control system, Antilock Braking

System (ABS). ABS monitors wheel speedcontinuously but is not involved in control-ling the wheel speed unless there is anemergency. In normal braking applications,the standard air brake system is in effect.

WARNINGFor proper ABS operation, do notchange tire sizes. The size of the tires

installed during production are pro-grammed into the electronic control unit.Installing different sized tires could re-sult in a reduced brake force, leading tolonger stopping distances or accidents.

There is a sensor installed in each wheel ona monitored axle. The sensors transmit in-formation to the electronic control unit(ECU). The ECU interprets the signals andcalculates wheel speed, wheel retardationand a vehicle reference speed. If the calcu-lations indicate a wheel lock-up situation, asignal is sent from the ECU to the appropri-ate ABS modulator valve to reduce brakingpressure. During emergency braking, themodulator valve alternately reduces, in-creases or maintains air pressure in thebrake chamber to prevent wheel lock-up.

Page 291: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 291/352

286 Brakes

During emergency or reduced-tractionstops, fully depress the foot brake pedal un-til the vehicle comes to a safe stop. DONOT PUMP the brake pedal. With thebrake pedal fully depressed, the ABS willcontrol all wheels to provide steering con-trol and a reduced braking distance.

Although the ABS improves vehicle controlduring emergency braking situations, theoperator still has the responsibility tochange driving styles depending on theexisting trafc, road and/or weather condi-tions. For example, the ABS cannot preventan accident if the driver is speeding or fol-

lowing too closely on slippery surfaces.The ABS control unit contains a self-testing program that is engaged each timethe ignition is turned on. The operator canverify the testing by listening for the ABSmodulator valves actuating twice in series.To increase the sound, hold down the footbrake pedal when the ignition is turned on.The self-test is not nished and the telltalewill stay on until the vehicle has started to

move. The wheel speed sensors are testedwhen the vehicle starts to move. If they testOK, the telltale will go out at approxi-mately 7 mph (11 km/h).

WARNINGIf any of the ABS telltales come on dur-ing driving or do not go out after a shorttime after turning on the ignition, takethe vehicle to a Volvo Truck dealer torepair the ABS or brake system. The ve-hicle can still be driven with a problemin the ABS system. However, ABS willnot be working and the standard brakingsystem will be in effect.

W3000905

Page 292: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 292/352

Brakes 287

Traction Control System (TCS) (option)The Traction Control System (TCS) usesthe same wheel sensors as the ABS to de-termine if one set of drive wheels is

spinning much more rapidly than the wheelset on the other side. If the TCS determinesthat a wheel is spinning (with vehicle speedbelow 25 mph [40 km/h]), it operates thebrake system to apply some brake force tostop the spinning wheel(s). This puts thedrive power over to the stationary wheel(s).

If vehicle speed is above 25 mph(40 km/h), a signal is sent to the engineECU, which reduces the engine speed to beconsistent with vehicle speed. This actionhelps reduce the amount of wheel spin andgives the operator greater vehicle control.

W3000962

The TCS includes a switch to turn of thefunction. When the switch is in the OFFposition, the TCS operates normally to in-crease traction if the drive wheels arespinning. When the switch is pressed once,the TCS telltale in the instrument clusterblinks continuously, indicating that the TCSis in mud/snow mode.

The mud/snow mode increases availabletraction on soft surfaces like snow, slush ormud by slightly increasing the allowablewheel spin. This prevents the wheels fromgetting bogged down. The TCS will resumenormal operation when the TCS switch ispressed again and the TCS telltale goes out

or when the ignition is turned off.

CAUTION

Do not engage the differential lockswhile wheels are spinning. Serious dam-age to the differential will occur. Seepage 311 for more information.

W3001336

Page 293: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 293/352

288 Brakes

Vehicle Speed Retardation Devices

When operating a tractor bobtail (with-out a trailer) or on slippery roads, theengine brake switch must be in the“OFF ” position. Failure to follow thisinstruction can result in loss of vehiclecontrol and serious personal injury ordeath.

WARNINGA vehicle speed retardation device (suchas a “Jake-Brake,” “C-Brake,” “ExhaustBrake,” etc.) is not intended to bring thevehicle to a stop. A vehicle speed retar-dation device is only intended to retardthe vehicle speed under certain condi-tions.

NOTE! If a Volvo engine is equipped witha Volvo Engine Brake, the brake will not

operate with full power until the enginecoolant temperature has reached 110 F(45 C).

NOTE! It is normal for there to be a slightdelay in the application of a vehicle speedretardation device. When using devices of this type, be sure to think ahead and ana-lyze conditions in order to use the deviceproperly.

Page 294: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 294/352

Brakes 289

Volvo Exhaust BrakeThe exhaust brake is standard on the VolvoD12 engine. It is used to reduce wear onthe brake linings. The exhaust brake ismost effective at high engine speeds (1,500to 2,300 r/min). The exhaust brake is auto-matically disengaged if the engine speeddrops to or below 1,100 r/min.

The exhaust brake works by containing theexhaust gases in the exhaust manifold,thereby making the engine work against theback pressure. This provides a retardingforce on the drive wheels.

The exhaust brake is operated by a two-position switch in the right-hand switchcluster. For the exhaust brake to function,the following must be in effect:

• The switch is ON

• Accelerator and clutch pedals are fullyreleased

• Engine speed exceeds 1,100 r/min

When the cruise control is engaged, the ex-haust brake automatically engages if theselected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The exhaustbrake is then disengaged when the speedhas returned to approximately 3 mph (5km/h) above selected cruise speed.

NOTE! For both exhaust and enginebrakes, use a “one gear” driving strategywhen going downhill to keep engine speedup for effective braking (for example: up-hill 7th gear and downhill 6th).

W3001324

Page 295: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 295/352

290 Brakes

Volvo Engine Brake (option)The Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) has ahigher braking effect than the exhaustbrake. The engine brake is most effective athigh engine speeds (1,500 to 2,300 r/min).It is automatically disengaged if enginespeed drops below 1,100 r/min.

The engine brake function is operated byone switch in the right hand switch cluster.It works together with the exhaust brake toprovide two levels of braking power. Theswitch has three positions: OFF, LOW andHIGH. With the switch in position LOW,

only the exhaust brake is engaged. With theswitch in position HIGH, both the exhaustbrake and the compression brake are acti-vated. For the engine brake to function, thefollowing must be in effect:

• The switch is ON• Vehicle speed over 7.5 mph (12 km/h)• Engine temperature over 110 F (43 C)• Accelerator and clutch pedals are fully

released• Engine speed over 1,100 r/min

When the cruise control is engaged, the en-gine brake automatically engages if theselected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The enginebrake is then disengaged when the speedhas returned to approximately 3 mph(5 km/h) above selected cruise speed.

W3001324

Too Cold for Engine Brake (Volvo Engine Only)Position 2 of the engine brake should notbe switched on until the engine has becomewarm (over 110 F [45 C]). If position 2 isselected and the engine is too cold, thissymbol will be shown (however, VEB isnot activated).

T3009355

Page 296: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 296/352

Brakes 291

Jake-Brake Or C-BrakeThe Jake-Brake or C-Brake is optionalequipment for Cummins and Detroit Dieselengines. These engine brakes are similar inoperation. Three power levels are availableby engaging 2, 4, or 6 cylinders when brak-ing. (For Cummins M11, only two powerlevels are available.)

It is operated by two switches in the righthand switch cluster. It works together withthe exhaust brake to provide two levels of braking power. The left switch is theON/OFF switch. The desired braking poweris selected with the right switch which hasthree positions: LOW, MED. and HIGH(for Cummins M11, only LOW and HIGH).

For the exhaust brake to function, the fol-lowing must be in effect:

• The switch is ON• Vehicle speed over 7.5 mph (12 km/h)• Engine temperature over 110 F (43 C)• Accelerator and clutch pedals fully re-

leased• Engine speed exceeding 1100 r/min

When the cruise control is engaged, the ex-haust brake automatically engages if theselected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The exhaustbrake is then disengaged when the speedhas returned to approximately 3 mph(5 km/h) above the selected cruise speed.

For more information, read the Jake-Brakeor C-Brake operator’s manual.

W3002303

Page 297: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 297/352

292 Electrical System

Electrical SystemGeneral Safety Guidelines

WARNINGFailure to repair a malfunction in theelectrical system can result in seriousdamage to vehicle or re. Always let anexperienced electrical technician performrepairs.

WARNING

Always wear eye protection when work-ing around batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to contact with battery acid.

WARNINGAlways replace fuses and circuit break-ers with the same current/amperagerating. Never substitute a fuse with foil,wire or nails. Increasing fuse or circuitbreaker ratings or substituting a fusewith foil, wire or nails may result inelectrical circuit overheating and possi-ble re and injury.

CAUTIONElectronic circuits and components aredesigned to sense voltage differencessmaller than 1 volt. While static electric-ity is not normally dangerous to humans,it can seriously damage electronic cir-cuits and components. Circuit boardsmounted in the instrument cluster, forexample, may not fail immediately afterbeing hit with a static discharge. Rather,they may work for a while and then failfor no apparent reason. Therefore, al-ways work with proper grounding strapsand antistatic mats around electric com-ponents.

CAUTIONToday’s vehicles contain a high numberof electronic devices. It is very impor-tant to exercise caution when workingon a modern electrical system, chargingbatteries or jump starting the engine. Tominimize the risk of any damage to theelectronic components, follow the proce-dures below when work is being done tothe electrical system.

NOTE! Do not work on the electric systemwithout proper tools and training. Repairwork to the electrical system must be doneby trained professionals. Your Volvo Truck dealer has the right tools and trained tech-nicians.

Page 298: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 298/352

Electrical System 293

Charging SystemAn alternator with an integrated regulator isused to supply power to the vehicle electri-cal system. The charging system voltageshould be checked periodically to preventovercharging or undercharging the batteriesand to detect any voltage drop in the wiring.

W3000978

Battery Box

When inspecting or cleaning batteries,never smoke or expose batteries (or theareas around them) to sparks or ames.The battery area may contain an explo-sive gas mixture that can ignite, causingan explosion, leading to serious personalinjury or death.

WARNINGBattery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproduc-tive harm. Wash hands after handling toprevent personal injury.

WARNINGAlways wear eye protection when work-ing around batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to contact with sulfuricacid or an explosion.

W8002032

Page 299: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 299/352

294 Electrical System

On a vehicle with air fairings, batteries canbe checked through the access door. Forfull access, the fairing needs to be removed.

To remove the fairing, remove the two hexbolts in the corners of the step and the fourscrews to the cab. The whole panel cannow be removed.

W8001362

Page 300: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 300/352

Electrical System 295

On a vehicle without air fairings, the bat-tery cover is also a base for the cab steps.To remove the cover, unhook the two rub-ber latches and lift the cover up and out.

When installing the battery cover, makesure it is resting properly on the boxbefore fastening the latches. Faulty in-stallation may cause the cover to shiftwhen the steps are used, which may leadto a fall, causing serious personal injuryor death.

W3002421

There may be three or four batteries in-stalled. Always make sure the batteries arefastened properly in the box.

When disconnecting battery terminals, al-ways disconnect the main ground terminalrst. When reconnecting, always connectthe main ground terminal last.

W3002368

Page 301: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 301/352

296 Electrical System

Battery Jump Starting and ChargingTo access the batteries on a vehicleequipped with side fairings, open the fair-ing access cover. On the second batteryfrom the front there are special, longerposts installed to accept jumper cables.

When jumping batteries to start an engine,it is important that the jumper cables areconnected directly from one set of batteriesin one vehicle to the other set of batteriesin the other vehicle (unless vehicle isequipped with optional Emergency StartSystem). This way the cranking current iscarried through the proper starter wiring.

W3000980

Connect the jumper cables to the positive,or “hot” terminal rst and ground terminallast. When disconnecting the cables, dis-connect the ground terminal rst. Connectthe jumper cable clamps to the dischargedbattery rst and to the booster battery last.Avoid creating sparks by making all con-nections quickly and rmly. Do not permitvehicles to touch each other when jumpstarting.

Do not attempt to jump-start a vehicleequipped with Delco Maintenance Freebatteries if the test indicator is light yel-low. Replace the battery instead.Jump-starting may cause battery to ex-

plode causing skin burns from acid orserious personal injury or death.

WARNINGAlways wear eye protection when work-ing around batteries to prevent the risk of injury due to contact with sulfuricacid or an explosion.

W3002432

Page 302: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 302/352

Electrical System 297

Charging the BatteryHigh voltage machines that are used forwork on the vehicle can do damage to theelectrical system, especially to its electroniccomponents. Welding or quick-chargingmachines subject the wiring to excessivevoltage, which may often result in damageto electrical and electronic componentsanywhere on the vehicle.

CAUTIONAttempting to work on electronic com-

ponents without proper equipment candamage internal parts with static elec-tricity.

Do not work on the electrical system with-out the proper tools and training. Repairwork to the electrical system must alwaysbe done by trained professionals. YourVolvo Truck dealer has the right tools andtrained technicians.

Jump Starting the EngineIf the batteries are discharged to the pointwhere they do not have enough stored en-ergy to start the engine, they should berecharged using a low charge current, notto exceed 16 volts .

If the vehicle needs to be started immedi-ately, use starting batteries. Connect thebatteries according to the information onthe previous page.

DO NOT use battery chargers with“boosting” capability. These produce a highvoltage current that will cause damage tothe vehicle electrical and electroniccomponents.

Page 303: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 303/352

298 Electrical System

Electronic Components

CAUTIONElectronic circuits and components aredesigned to sense voltage differencessmaller than 1 volt. While static electric-ity is not normally dangerous to humans,it can seriously damage electronic cir-cuits and components. Circuit boardsmounted in the instrument cluster maynot fail immediately after being hit witha static discharge. Rather, they may work

for a while and then fail for no apparentreason. Therefore, always work withproper grounding straps and antistaticmats around electronic components.

Welding

CAUTIONWelding on the vehicle can damage theelectrical system or components due tothe high voltage and current spikes thatnormally occur when welding. It ispreferable to avoid welding on an as-sembled vehicle. However, if anystructure on or in contact with thevehicle must be welded, follow the rec-ommendations below.

Page 304: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 304/352

Electrical System 299

CAUTIONIf there are other ground cables con-nected to the battery (such as engine

ECU, etc.), disconnect those ground ca-bles rst, then remove the main batteryground cable. Electronic modules maybe damaged when additional grounds areconnected/disconnected without themain battery ground connected. Discon-nect the main battery ground last .

Before welding on the vehicle, electricalpower needs to be disconnected and somecomponents must also be disconnected:

• Disconnect both the negative (-) andpositive (+) battery cables. Disconnectthe negative cable rst. Reconnect thepositive cable rst.

• Disconnect engine/starter ground fromthe chassis. This connection is locatedoutside the left hand frame rail in the

engine compartment.

• Disconnect the power harness and ve-hicle interface harness at the engineelectronic control unit (EECU).

• If the vehicle is equipped with systemsthat have their own ECUs (such as thevehicle ECU (VECU), ABS system,air bag or some transmission systems),disconnect each ECU at their electricalconnection.

• Disconnect the electrical connectionsat the rear of the instrument cluster.

• Reposition or shield any parts thatwould be damaged by hightemperatures.

T8006862

Page 305: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 305/352

300 Electrical System

• Attach the welder ground cable asclose to the weld area as possible (6”or less).

• Do not connect the welder ground ca-ble to the EECU or its cooling plate.

• Welding cables should not be allowedto lay on, near or cross over any elec-trical wiring or electronic componentduring the welding procedure.

• After nishing welding and the weldedareas having cooled, inspect wiringand components for possible shorts ordamage. In the event of a short circuit,excessive current will be drawn whenthe batteries are reconnected, causingmore damage to the electrical system.

CAUTIONDo not weld on the engine or enginecomponents. Welding on the engine orcomponents mounted on the engine cancause serious damage to the engineECU.

Page 306: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 306/352

Electrical System 301

Battery Protection System (option)An electronic battery monitor (“BatteryLifeguard”) may be installed in the electri-cal center. This monitor will disconnectcertain circuits if it senses that the batteryvoltage falls under a safe charging level.

Before disconnecting, the monitor willsound a loud and distinct alarm, alternatinglong and short beeps, for approximately60 seconds.

At the end of the alarm, the monitor discon-nects circuits to protect the batteries. Whenthe batteries are charged, either through thevehicle alternator or a connected batterycharger, the monitor will automatically re-store power to the disconnected circuits.

Disconnected circuits are connected to fusepositions F15 through 35. These circuits areprimarily feeding the sleeper area andheadlights.

Unless the batteries are held at an elevatedvoltage for several hours, they will only de-velop a “surface” charge. That charge willquickly go away and the relay will retrip.

W3002365

Page 307: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 307/352

302 Electrical System

Electrical Center

W8000923

The electrical center is located in the mid-dle of the dash. All the relays and fuses inthe cab are collected here. The cover panelsare fastened with screws that can be turnedwith a coin. Since the function of somefuses or relays may change for the vehicleapplication, refer to the list of functions thatis attached to the underside of each panel.

All fuses and relays are accessible underthe top cover.W3002514

Fuses are standard. Reset breakers are avail-able as an option for some circuits. If a fusecontinues to melt or disconnect, the circuit

has a malfunction and must be repaired.

If a breaker disconnects, the ignition ormain switch must be switched off beforethe breaker resets.

WARNING

Failure to repair a malfunction in theelectrical system can result in seriousdamage to electrical components and ve-hicle re.

Page 308: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 308/352

Electrical System 303

The fuses and relays are all accessible un-der the top cover on the dash.

W3002526

One type of fuse in the new electrical cen-ter are termed “mini-fuses” and require apuller tool to remove from the fuse block.The puller tool is part of the Owner’s Pack-age. To order a new puller, specify partnumber 20378326.

W3002525

Mini-fuse puller tool

Page 309: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 309/352

304 Electrical System

Power StudsOn the passenger side of the dash arepower studs for a CB hook-up. These studsare standard equipment. For a proper hook-up, use fork type connectors on the wiresor use “banana” plugs.

CAUTIONIf stripped wire ends are used, makesure there are no wire strands that canbridge between the studs.

The red stud is the positive terminal andthe black stud is the ground terminal.Power from the studs must not exceed a10 amp draw. Before connecting any elec-trical accessory, make sure it is made for12 V operation.

W3002001

The top tray is available as a CB mountwith a strap to hold different size radios se-curely in place.

W8001876

Page 310: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 310/352

Electrical System 305

12 Volt Power OutletsThere are a number of 12 V outlets that canbe accessed in the cab or the sleeper area.On the dash, there are cigar lighter and CBpower studs as possible 12 V outlets.

In the VN-610 and VN-660 sleeper, there isan unswitched power outlet on the sleepercontrol panel. The outlet is covered by acap that is pulled out for access.

The outlet is made for a cigar lighter typeplug.

On the panel is also a cigar lighter that canbe used for an additional 12 V outlet.

W3002430

In the VN-770 sleeper, there are the samepanel mounted outlets as for the VN-610 aswell as outlets in the cabinets. For thedriver side cabinet, the two outlets areswitched. The switch is located on thesleeper control panel and is used forswitching off a refrigerator if the vehicle isparked for a longer time.

W3002333

Outlets in the passenger side cabinetsreceive unswitched power. Normal acces-

sories for this cabinet will have on/off switches of their own.

The cabinet 12 V outlets have cigar lightertype plugs.

W3002000

Page 311: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 311/352

306 Electrical System

120 Volt System and OutletsThe VN-610, VN-660 and VN-770 areavailable with an optional 120 V service,used for longer parking while still living inthe vehicle. The 120 V service is suppliedfrom outside sources.

When parked on wet ground, avoid us-ing an external power source to connectthe cab power plug. Water is a conduc-tor of electricity. Personal injury or

death resulting from electrical shock canoccur in wet conditions.

To hook up the service, there is a socket(1 - lower illustration) located under thedriver side door. If the vehicle is equippedwith an engine heater, the socket for cabpower is on the bottom.

W3001996

Power goes through a breaker box (2) lo-

cated on the front wall in the driver sideluggage compartment. On the right is anON/OFF switch and on the left is theground fault interrupter. The controls arealso reached from the inside of the cabthrough the hatch under the mattress orcushion.

W3001999

Page 312: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 312/352

Electrical System 307

From the breaker box, power goes to threeoutlets. One is on the driver side bunk box(4). There is one outlet in each tower cabi-net in the middle compartment (3 and 5).

W3002367

Page 313: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 313/352

308 Electrical System

Changing Headlight BulbThe headlight bulb can be accessed fromthe rear of the headlight assembly. Raisethe hood. Remove the clamps from the back of the headlight box by lifting and pushingthem to the side. Remove the cover.

Remove the terminal from the back of thebulb by bending up the lock tabs andpulling back at the same time. Turn thelock ring counterclockwise and remove.Pull out the bulb.

W3002422

NOTE! When removing the new bulb fromthe box, do not touch the glass with ngersor anything that may put grease on theglass surface.

Install the bulb and line up with the loca-tion tab by turning it and then push it inuntil fully seated. Install the lock ring. Push

the terminal back on. Check that the rubberseal is clean and then install cover and snapthe clamps over it. Make sure to use thecorrect replacement bulb. W3002424

Page 314: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 314/352

Power Steering 309

GeneralThe power steering consists of an inte-grated gear and hydraulic power cylinder,

and a power steering pump with uid con-tainer. The pump, driven by the engine,provides hydraulic pressure to the powersteering. If the engine is not working, thesteering is only manual. With the powersteering not working, the effort required toturn the steering wheel is much greaterthan with power assist. If the power steer-ing assist fails, bring the vehicle to a safestop. Do not drive the vehicle until correct-ing the cause of the problem.

Do not drive the vehicle without powerassisted steering. When the power assisthas failed, the effort to turn the steeringwheel is much greater, especially insharp turns or at low speeds. This cancause an accident and lead to serious

personal injury or death.While operating the vehicle, avoid ruts andobstructions which cause a binding condi-tion on the sides of the front wheels. Drivethe vehicle out of the rut, then turn thesteering wheel. If possible, avoid turningthe wheels while the vehicle is at a stand-still as this places a considerable load onthe power steering system and front axle.

Page 315: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 315/352

310 Power Steering

Periodically check the power steering uidreservoir and keep it lled to the properlevel with the recommended uid. See the“Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and En-gine ” for more information.

There is also a lter inside the reservoirthat needs to be changed every 12 months.

W6000874

Adjustable Steering Column (option)The steering column is xed as standard.An adjustable steering column is availableas an option. The adjustment device is op-erated by a pedal on the left side of theoor. To make adjustments, depress thepedal and move the steering column to thedesired position and then release the pedal.

Do not try to make adjustments to thesteering wheel while the vehicle is mov-ing. Make all adjustments before startingto drive to prevent loss of vehicle con-trol and personal injury or death.

W6000876

Page 316: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 316/352

Axles and Wheels 311

AxlesDifferential LocksThe drive axle(s) may be equipped withdifferential locks. The single drive axle willonly have a wheel differential lock. Withtandem drive axles, there could be bothwheel differential locks and an inter-axledifferential lock.

CAUTIONNever operate the vehicle with the dif-ferentials locked any longer than isnecessary as this places a great strain onthe axles and may cause rapid tire wear.

The differential lock should be used on icyor slippery surfaces. As soon as theslippery surface has been passed, the differ-ential lock should be disengaged.

Differential locks must not, under any cir-cumstances, be engaged when in awheel-spin situation. Engage the locksahead of the slippery area. If already slip-ping, stop the wheels, engage the locks andthen continue. If the differential locks areengaged when the wheels are spinning, thedifferential will be damaged and the rearaxle drive unit could possibly fail.

Page 317: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 317/352

312 Axles and Wheels

Engaging the differential locks must alwaysbe done in the following way (see page 110for switch location):

1 Depress the clutch pedal. Wait for thedrive wheels to stop spinning

2 Engage the differential lock 3 Engage a suitable gear4 Carefully release the clutch pedal

Under normal traction conditions, do notengage the differential locks. If at all possi-ble, do not use the differential locks whiletaking a curve. With good traction and thedifferential locks engaged, the vehicle willbe understeered and therefore will tend todrive straight in a curve. If the locks mustbe used on good traction surface, drive cau-tiously and do not exceed 25 mph(40 km/h). Disengage the locks as soon aspossible.

When the differential locks are disengaged,the couplings may be under tension. Disen-gage the locks by returning the switch tothe OFF position. Help with the disengage-

ment by briey letting up on the acceleratorto relieve the torque on the couplings.

W3001991

The telltales for the differential locks are inthe instrument cluster. See page 86 formore information on the telltales.

W3000904

Page 318: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 318/352

Axles and Wheels 313

WheelsGeneralDue to the size, equipment needed and theprocedures used to change wheels, thisshould be done through the Volvo Truck dealer. By having an expert technician per-form this procedure, personal injury andproperty damage may be avoided.

NOTE! When replacing the wheel equip-ment or tires, use the same size wheels ortires as originally manufactured. Changingthe tire or wheel size will affect brake per-formance. If changing tire size, ABS and

speedometer must be recalibrated.

Check Tightening Wheel Nuts

Failure to properly torque-tighten thewheel nuts can result in the breakage of wheel studs and the subsequent loss of

wheels. Loss of vehicle control and seri-ous personal injury or death could occur.

Check tighten all wheel nuts after the rst50 to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) and therst 50 to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) aftereach tire service. This applies to both sin-gle and dual wheels in connection withnormal service but should be performed atleast every six months.

This check tightening is particularly impor-tant when rims or brake drums are newlypainted. Paint can ake off from these sur-faces, causing the nuts to lose their gripand the wheel to loosen.

W7000774

8 and 10 stud wheelnut tighteningsequence.

Page 319: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 319/352

314 Axles and Wheels

Inating TiresAlways check ination pressures when thetires are cool, using an accurate tire pres-sure gauge. Check the pressures at regular

intervals.

CAUTIONNever bleed the air from hot tires. In-creased tire pressure measured in a hottire is normal. Lower than recommendedpressures may cause side wall exing re-sulting in increased tire heat. This maycause premature tire failure.

W7000437

Tires and wheels must be serviced only

by a qualied technician. Do not attemptto perform this work yourself. Inatedtires on wheels contain compressed airand if suddenly released, do so with anexplosive force. Serious personal injuryor death can occur.

For specic information and warranty onrims and tires, contact the tire manufac-turer’s distributor. Check tires for abnormalwear. Also, check the tread depth. W7000773

Page 320: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 320/352

Axles and Wheels 315

Wheel Bearing AdjustmentFor reliable operation and adequate servicelife, the wheel bearings must be properlyadjusted and checked during the service pe-

riod. Loose wheel bearings could causepremature tire wear and possibly affect ve-hicle handling. See your Volvo Truck dealer for proper servicing.

Watch carefully for oil leaks and listen forunusual noises. These are indications of worn bearings, bad seals or misadjustedbearings. These are problems which mustbe corrected as soon as possible.

Failure to keep wheel bearings properlyadjusted may result in accelerated tirewear, poor handling and wheel separa-tion from the vehicle.Failure to properly maintain bearings

can ultimately result in loss of wheeland vehicle control, and cause seriouspersonal injury or death.

W7000438

Page 321: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 321/352

316 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Fifth Wheel General InformationThe standard fth wheel is manufacturedby ASF. Other fth wheels available as op-

tions are Holland and Fontaine.Things to think about with trailer hook-up:

• Check the load distribution betweenaxles.

• Always chock the trailer wheels.

• Grease the plate. No grease on theplate will produce heavy steering.

• Verify visually that coupling has oc-curred.

• Verify visually that plungers havelocked on slider.

• Check for slack between the 5th wheeland the trailer kingpin.

Always have all fth wheel maintenanceand repairs done by a qualied techni-cian. An incorrect repair can cause thetrailer to separate from the tractor caus-ing an accident with serious personalinjury or death.

W9000494

1 Kingpin lock air releaseswitch.

2 Danger.

Page 322: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 322/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 317

Fifth Wheel Kingpin Lock Release SwitchOperation:

Activation of the kingpin lock releaseswitch ONLY unlocks the kingpin latchmechanishm. To relock the latch mecha-nism, you MUST pull forward and thenback up to re-engange the kingpin lock mechanism. Failure to follow these in-structions can result in separation of thetrailer from the tractor causing personal

injury or death.

• Park the vehicle and apply parkingbrake for tractor trailer.

• Put gearshift in neutral and chock trailer wheels.

• Lower trailer landing gear to ground.

• Disconnect air/electric lines to tailer.

• To release the th wheel kingpin lock,push the switch up. This will releasethe locking mechanism. Once acti-vated, the switch will not relock thefth wheel kingpin locking mecha-nism.

• Release parking brake and drive trac-tor 12 inches away from the kingpin.

• Deate air suspension by pressing bot-tom of suspension switch.

• After suspesion lowers, pull clear of trailer and reinate suspension. See:“Suspension Level” page 111.

•The fth wheel kingpin lock will onlyrelock if you follow the complete re-coupling procedures. See: “TrailerCoupling Procedures” page 323.

Page 323: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 323/352

318 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Safety InformationFollow the instructions on the advisory la-bels attached to the various manufacturers’fth wheels. An operator’s manual from the

manufacturer is supplied with each fthwheel and is provided in the Owner’s pack-age.

W9000183

If the fth wheel is equipped with a slidingmounting, follow the advisory labels at-tached to the component. Also, read theliterature provided by the manufacturer.

W9000185

Always keep the fth wheel plate welllubricated to prevent binding betweenthe tractor and trailer. A binding fthwheel could cause erratic steering andloss of vehicle control that may result inserious personal injury or death.

W9000198

Page 324: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 324/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 319

Fifth WheelThere are three operating positions for thefth wheel locking mechanism (ASF fthwheel is shown):

Locked — This is the position that the fthwheel will be in with a trailer hooked up.In the locked position, the operating rod isretracted and the safety latch will freelyswing back and forth.

W9000180

Lockset — This is the position the fthwheel is in when uncoupling the trailer. Toachieve the lockset position, the operatingrod is pulled out with a slight upward mo-tion. The operating rod shoulder will catchon the plate casting. The safety latch is ro-

tated toward the rear of the fth wheel.

W9000242

Open — This is the position the fthwheel is in after the trailer is uncoupled.The jaw is open and the operating rod isnow dropped down and can be freelymoved around. The safety latch is rotatedtoward the rear of the fth wheel. This isthe position the fth wheel must be inwhen being coupled to a trailer.

W9000203

Page 325: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 325/352

320 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Fifth Wheel Slider (option)The fth wheel comes standard with an airoperational slider. To remain within legalweight limits, this feature allows the driver

to distribute the load easily on the axles.The air operated slider takes the work outof adjusting the tractor for various trailerloads. The fth wheel portion is easily ad- justed, even with a fully loaded trailerconnected.

Movement between the adjustable saddleplate and the stationary base plate rail canresult in wear, causing longitudinal, latitu-

dinal and vertical slack. Field repairs canbe made to reduce this slack for additionalservice life.

W9000205

Page 326: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 326/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 321

Unlocking the Fifth WheelAlways check out the entire fth wheelequipment before attempting to couple to atrailer (ASF fth wheel is shown):

• If not lubricated properly, add greaseto the top of the fth wheel plate.

• Make sure the mounting of the fthwheel to the frame is tight and in goodcondition.

• If using a sliding fth wheel, makesure the slide locking plungers are in a

locked position.

The following instructions are for preparingthe fth wheel for coupling to a trailer:

Rotate the safety latch toward the rear of the fth wheel.

W9000180

Using a slight upward motion, pull the op-erating rod out until the operating rod

shoulder is outside the fth wheel operatingslot.

W9000202

Page 327: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 327/352

322 Fifth Wheel Instructions

When the shoulder of the operating rod isoutside of the operating slot, raise the oper-ating rod handle to its maximum upwardposition.

W9000242

Release the operating rod. The upper shoul-

der of the operating rod should now be incontact with the plate casting above the op-erating slot. The fth wheel is now in thelockset position and a trailer can becoupled.

W9000274

Page 328: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 328/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 323

Trailer Coupling ProceduresThis procedure covers vehicles with andwithout air suspension.

Failure to properly couple the tractor andtrailer can result in trailer separation,causing death and property damage.

Using the following procedures, inspect theequipment before coupling to a trailer:

Make sure the fth wheel is properly lubri-

cated and the jaw is in the open position.

W8001449

WARNINGIf the jaw is not in the open position,use a pry bar to rotate the jaw to theopen position. The lock is spring loaded.Keep hands away to avoid injury.

Use a pry bar to open the fth wheel jaw,if necessary.

W8001450

Make sure the plate is tilted downward tothe proper position at the rear.

W9000236

Page 329: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 329/352

324 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Make sure the mounting of the fth wheelto the tractor frame is tight and in goodcondition.

If using a sliding fth wheel, make sure theslide locking plungers are fully engaged.

W9000205

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(both on the front and rear of the wheel) onboth sides of the trailer.

W9000263

Back up close to the trailer, centering thekingpin on the throat of the fth wheel, andSTOP.

NOTE! For tractors with air ride suspen-sion, make sure the suspension controlswitch is in the “RIDE” position (switchpushed in at the top) and the air springs areinated.

W3001341

Page 330: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 330/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 325

Connect the air brake lines and the electri-cal power cord. Make sure that any slack inthe lines is supported so that the brake linesdo not become entangled. Set the trailerbrakes by pulling out the Trailer Supplycontrol on the dashboard.

W5000713

Check to see that the trailer is at the properheight for coupling. The leading edge of the trailer plate should initially contact thefth wheel top plate surface about 8 in.(200 mm) behind the pivot point as thetractor backs under the trailer. Raise orlower the trailer landing gear as required toobtain this position.

WARNINGAttempting to couple with the trailer atan improper height could result in afalse or improper couple and cause dam-age to the tractor, fth wheel and trailer,and possible personal injury.

Back under the trailer, keeping the trailerkingpin centered in the throat of the fthwheel. After picking up the trailer — STOP— then continue backing until the fthwheel locks rmly on the kingpin. Stoppinghelps prevent hitting the kingpin too hard.

As an initial check, pull forward to test thecompleteness of the coupling.

W9000237

Page 331: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 331/352

326 Fifth Wheel Instructions

CAUTION

A direct visual check is required to en-sure proper coupling. Several types of improper couplings will pass the initialpull test. Sound is not reliable. Do nottake for granted that you are properlycoupled. Get out of the cab and look.

W9000286

Failed trailer coupling

Make sure the trailer kingpin is in the jawslot and that the jaw is closed behind thepin. The kingpin should not overhang thefth wheel or be caught in the greasegroove.

To verify that the kingpin is actually in thefth wheel slot and the jaw is closed, thepin must be visually inspected from therear. Use a ashlight if necessary.

W9000181

Make sure the trailer bed is resting on thetop surface of the fth wheel plate, and thatthere is no visible gap between the fthwheel and the trailer bed plate.

Make sure trailer is properly connectedbefore moving vehicle. Trailer separa-tion, accident, and injury or death mayoccur if trailer is not properly connected.

W9000240

Page 332: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 332/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 327

Make sure the operating rod is fully re-tracted, the safety latch is positioned abovethe handle and the latch swings freely.

If the fth wheel is equipped with a manualsecondary lock, check to see that it is prop-erly engaged.

NOTE! If you cannot get a proper cou-pling, repeat this procedure. Do not use anyfth wheel which fails to operate properly.

W9000180

Check the kingpin to fth wheel clearanceby moving the tractor backward and for-ward with the trailer brakes set. If theclearance appears excessive (more than1/8 in. [3 mm]), or if the jaw does not lock,the fth wheel should be inspected by aqualied technician before proceeding.

Wind up the trailer landing gear (trailersupport) to its fully retracted position. Folddown or remove the crank handle and placeit in the crank handle holder.

Check the air brake lines and the trailerlight cord connections.

Remove the wheel chocks from the trailerwheels.

Make sure trailer is properly connectedbefore moving vehicle. Trailer separa-tion, accident, and injury or death mayoccur if trailer is not properly connected.

Page 333: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 333/352

328 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Trailer Uncoupling ProceduresFor Tractors With Air Ride Suspension:Set the system park brake on the tractor.

Set the trailer brakes by pulling out thetrailer air supply knob.

W5000921

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(one on the front and one on the rear of the

wheel) on both sides of the trailer.

W9000263

Wind down the landing gear until it touchesthe ground and then give it a few extraturns in low gear. Do not raise the traileroff of the fth wheel. Fold down or removethe crank handle and place it in the crank handle holder.

NOTE! In poor ground conditions, it maybe necessary to provide a stable base forthe landing gear.

Page 334: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 334/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 329

Disconnect the light cord and air brakelines. Use the dummy air couplings to keepforeign material from entering the brakelines.

Unlock the fth wheel.

NOTE! If the operating rod is too difcultto pull, back the tractor up slightly to re-lieve any kingpin load against the fthwheel jaw.

W9000275

Release the tractor park brakes and pull thetractor away from the kingpin about12 in. (300 mm) and STOP. Do not allowthe fth wheel to leave the underside of thetrailer.

W9000239

Select the “UNCOUPLE” position (pushdown the latch and press in the bottom partof the switch) on the suspension controlswitch to deate the air springs.

W3001341

Page 335: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 335/352

330 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Wait about 30 seconds for the air springs todeate.

W9000238

With the suspension lowered, pull clear of the trailer and immediately select the“RIDE” position (press the top part of theswitch in) on the suspension control. Thisrestores the suspension to operating height.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must never be driven withthe air springs deated. Damage to airsuspension parts will occur if springs arenot inated properly.

W8001459

After the trailer is uncoupled, the fthwheel will be in the open position. The op-erating rod will drop and can be movedaround freely.

W9000203

Page 336: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 336/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 331

For Tractors Without Air Ride Suspension:Set the system park brake on the tractor.

Set the trailer brakes by pulling out thetrailer air supply knob.

W5000921

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(both on the front and rear of the wheel) onboth sides of the trailer.

W9000263

Wind down the landing gear until it touches

the ground and then give it a few extraturns in low gear. Do not raise the traileroff of the fth wheel. Fold down or removethe crank handle and place it in the crank handle holder.

NOTE! In poor ground conditions, it maybe necessary to provide a stable base forthe landing gear.

Page 337: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 337/352

332 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Disconnect the light cord and air brakelines. Use the dummy air couplings to keepforeign material from entering the brakelines.

Unlock the fth wheel.

NOTE! If the operating rod is too difcultto pull, back the tractor up slightly to re-lieve any kingpin load against the fthwheel jaw.

W9000275

Release the tractor park brakes and slowlydrive the tractor out from under the trailer.Let the trailer slide down the fth wheeland pickup ramps.

W9000239

After the trailer is uncoupled, the fthwheel will be in the open position. The op-erating rod will drop and can be movedaround freely.

W9000203

Page 338: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 338/352

Fifth Wheel Instructions 333

Operating the Volvo Slider

CAUTION

The trailer must be stopped and thetrailer brakes locked, or damage to thetractor and/or trailer may result from un-controlled sliding of the fth wheel.

Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight lineon level ground.

Lock the trailer brakes by pulling out theTrailer Supply knob.

Release the slide locking plungers by mov-ing the switch to the “UNLOCK” position(press down the latch and push in the bot-tom part of the switch).

W3001346

Check to see that both of the slide plungershave released. If the plungers do not comeout, lower the landing gear to relieve thepressure on the plungers. Lowering thelanding gear will also allow the fth wheelto slide easier.

W9000205

Page 339: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 339/352

334 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Slowly drive the tractor forward or back-ward to position the fth wheel.

After sliding the fth wheel to the desiredposition, engage the slide locking plungersby moving the cab switch to the “LOCK”position (press in the top part of the switch).

W8001459

WARNINGDo not operate the vehicle if theplungers are not fully engaged and thetrailer landing gear is not fully retracted.Doing so may cause damage to the trac-tor, trailer and landing gear, loss of trailer and personal injury.

Visually check to see that the slideplungers are fully engaged. It may be nec-essary to leave the trailer brakes locked andto move the tractor slightly to engage theslide plungers into the rail.

Wind up the trailer landing gear to its fullyretracted position.

W9000205

Page 340: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 340/352

Emergency Information 335

Towing ProcedureGeneral

CAUTIONThe driveshaft must be removed beforetowing the vehicle. Failure to remove thedriveshaft may result in damage to thetransmission.

Remove the drive shaft from the rear axlebefore moving the vehicle, unless it onlyneeds to be moved a small distance forsafety reasons. When the transmission isdriven from the rear wheels without the en-gine running, there is no lubrication in thetransmission.

Axle shafts must be removed if the vehicleis to be towed at speeds over 25 mph(40 km/h) or for a long distance. Openingsshould be covered to prevent loss of oil andentry of dirt and grit. Where oil-lubricatedbearings are used, openings should be thor-oughly sealed with metal discs and newgaskets before towing.

WARNINGIf a vehicle with air suspension is liftedby the rear frame member, there is a risk that the air springs will separate fromthe spring plates. When towing has beencompleted, do not under any circum-stances use your hands to reposition theair springs. There is a great risk thatyour hand will be caught between springand plate causing personal injury.

T0006670

Page 341: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 341/352

336 Emergency Information

WARNINGDo not tow a vehicle backwards whenequipped with roof air fairings. The fair-ings act as an air scoop and may break off. Failure to follow this warning maylead to personal injury and vehicle dam-age.

WARNINGVehicles with air fairings are tall. Makesure that the total height of the vehicle,when it is raised up behind the wrecker,does not exceed the maximum allowedheight for local underpasses. Failure tofollow this instruction may lead to per-sonal injury and vehicle damage.

The vehicle may now be towed. It is rec-ommended that a wrecker with a lift bar isused since the service brakes will not func-tion. The system must be lled with air torelease the parking brake or follow the me-chanical spring brake caging procedures onpage 339.

NOTE! The power steering does not func-tion when towing a vehicle with a disabledengine.

W1000075

Page 342: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 342/352

Emergency Information 337

Towing Instructions

CAUTION

If the vehicle becomes disabled, it isvery important to tow it properly. Failureto do so can cause damage to the frameand body parts. Follow the instructionsbelow to avoid damage.

In the event that the vehicle cannot bereached to place the wrecker lift bar underthe front axle, use the tow eyes suppliedwith the vehicle. The front tow eyes areused as a point at the front of the vehiclewhere the vehicle can be pulled.

Do not use the tow eyes for raising thefront of the vehicle; the tow eyes canbreak. Do not crawl under a vehicle sus-pended by tow eyes. Failure to followthese instructions can result in serious

personal injury or death.

W8000941

On day cab models, the tow eyes are storedbolted to the back of the cab wall.

W8000943

Page 343: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 343/352

338 Emergency Information

On sleeper cab models, the tow eyes arestored bolted to the back wall of the lug-gage compartment wall.

W8000942

The tow eyes are held in place whenmounted on the front of the vehicle by trac-tor pins. These pins are stored in the toweye mounting holes when not being used.

W8000934

When the vehicle is located properly, liftthe front and locate the lift bar under thefront axle and secure. Using the front axlefor towing minimizes the possibility fordamage to the vehicle body, frame and sus-

pension.

NOTE! When the drive shaft or axle shaftsare reinstalled, make sure the nuts are tight-ened to the correct torques. Also make surethe axle shafts are installed in the propersides, with the left shaft in the left side andthe right shaft in the right side.

Page 344: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 344/352

Emergency Information 339

Caging Spring Brake ChambersThe parking spring brake chambers may bereleased mechanically if there is no com-pressed air available.

Always start by chocking the wheels toprevent the vehicle from rolling. Failureto do so can result in unexpected vehiclemovement and serious personal injury ordeath can occur.

Remove the plastic plug in the front end of the chamber. Remove the screw from theholder in the side of the brake chamber. In-sert the screw into the front hole and pushin until it bottoms. Screw into the cylinderso at least 4 to 6 threads have entered.

W5000643

Page 345: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 345/352

340 Emergency Information

Install the washer and nut. Tighten the nut.This compresses the brake chamber springand releases the parking brake.

Do not attempt in any way to disassem-ble or tamper with the spring brakechamber. If the force stored on thespring is suddenly released, it can causeserious personal injury or death.

W5000644

Page 346: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 346/352

Service Information 341

Service Assistance and ManualsYour Volvo Truck dealer is trained andequipped to perform expert service on your

Volvo vehicle. Your dealer has direct accessto Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. fortechnical help, parts or service information.

There is also a direct number to Volvo Ac-tion Service (VAS), staffed 24 hours a day,if you are in need of assistance. The num-ber to the Customer Support Center is:1 (800) 528–6586 (or (800) 52–VOLVO).Also on the internet:www.vas.volvo.com

VAS can offer:

DeliveryAssurance

If you have a breakdown,VAS can arrange for load

forwarding or equipmentrental.

PersonalAssurance

Trained staff for handlingany vehicle problems.

UptimeAssurance

VAS will locate the near-est service provider andguarantee payment soyou can get on the roadas soon as possible.

PriceAssurance

VAS audits service andparts billing to ensureguaranteed labor ratesand preferred partspricing for Volvo compo-nents.

Page 347: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 347/352

342 Service Information

To order a single Service Manual or a Ser-vice Manual Set for your vehicle, youshould contact your authorized Volvo Truck dealer or fax a request to the Volvo Truck North America, Inc. publications warehouse(Fax: (336) 668–3625). They will help youlocate the manual(s) you need.

To be able to handle the order correctly,you must give the model, year and VIN.(For VIN location, see page 16.)

Current prices for a Service Manual Set are$350.00 for vehicles with a Volvo engineand $300.00 for vehicles with a Cumminsor Detroit Diesel (engine manuals have tobe ordered separately from the manufac-turer). If complete wiring schematics areneeded, they can be ordered for $150.00.Billing will be done through the nearestVolvo Truck dealer.

NOTE! Prices subject to change withoutnotice. Please allow 30 days for delivery.

Name Company

Address

CSZ (Province, Postal Code)

Vehicle Model Phone/Fax

Model Year VIN

Item 1:

Item 2:

Item 3:

Item 4:

Item 5:

Page 348: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 348/352

Index 343

Index

AABS Telltale . . . . . . . . . . 88Acknowledge Information and StopMessages . . . . . . . . . . 130Additional Safety Features . . . 50Air Conditioning . . . . . . . 174Air Filters, Cab . . . . . . . 187Air Suspension Gauge . . . . . 90Air Suspension Telltale . . . . . 88Air Tanks . . . . . . . . . . 283Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Alternator . . . . . . . . . . 293Antenna Multiplexer . . . . . 232Antennas . . . . . . . . . . 231Antilock Braking System (ABS) 285Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . 112Axles and Wheels . . . . . . 311

BBattery Box . . . . . . . . . 293Battery Jump Start . . . . . . 296Battery Protection System . . . 301Blind Spots . . . . . . . . . . 3Bobtail Operation . . . . . . . 4Brake Application Gauge . . . . 90Brake System Air Pressure Gauge 91Brake System Controls . . . . 275Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . 272Brakes, General . . . . . . . 273Bunk Access . . . . . . . . . 213Bunk Restraints . . . . . . . . 53

Bunk, Sleeper . . . . . . . . 212C

C-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . 107Cab Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 24Cab Interior and Sleeper . . . 203Caging Spring Brakes . . . . . 339Canadian Consumer Complaints . 6CB-Radio . . . . . . . . . . 234CD-Changer . . . . . . . . . 233

Change Bulbs In Instrument . . . 95Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . 113Clock, Alarm, Sleeper . . . . 226Clock, Sleeper . . . . . . . . 224Clutch and Transmission . . . 269Clutch Operation . . . . . . . 269Cold Weather Operation . . . . 252Collision Warning System, VO-RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Comfort Clip . . . . . . . . . 60Communication and Entertainment231

Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 75Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 265Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . 229Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . 230

DDaily Maintenance Checks . . . 45Dash Overview . . . . . . . . 70Daytime Running Lights . . . 104Diff. Lock Switch . . . . . . 110Diff. Lock Telltale . . . . . . . 86Differential Locks . . . . . . 311Display Menu: Data Log Mode 152Display Menu: Faults? . . . . 170Display Menu: Fuel Economy . 163Display Menu: Gauge . . . . . 159Display Menu: Password Input . 158Display Menu: Set-Up Mode . 132Display Menu: System Diagnostic137Display Menu: Time/Distance . 165

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 20Door Operation . . . . . . . . 21Downhill Operation . . . . . . 263Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauge 89Driving Light Switch . . . . . 105

EElectric System, 120 V . . . . 306Electrical Center . . . . . . . 302Electrical Power Studs . . . . 304

Page 349: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 349/352

344 Index

Electrical System . . . . . . . 292Emergency Information . . . . 335Emissions Control Compliance . . 8Engine Brake . . . . . . . . 107

Engine Break-In . . . . . . . 257Engine Cold Start, Volvo . . . 249Engine Idling . . . . . . . . 260Engine Jump Start . . . . . . 297Engine Operation . . . . . . . 256Engine Overspeed . . . . . . 259Engine Serial Number Location,Volvo Engine . . . . . . . . . 18Engine Shut-Down System . . 258Engine Start and Operation . . 244Engine Start Procedure . . . . 244Engine Stopping . . . . . . . 247Entering Behind Cab . . . . . . 25Entering the Cab . . . . . . . . 24Ether Start . . . . . . . . . . 251Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . 107

FFastening Safety Belt . . . . . . 52Fifth Wheel Instructions . . . . 316Fifth Wheel Lock Telltale . . . . 86Fifth Wheel Slider . . . . . . 320Fifth Wheel Slider Operation . 333Fifth Wheel Unlocking . . . . 321Fifth Wheel, General . . . . . 316Fog light Switch . . . . . . . 105Folding Gear Lever . . . . . . 270Foot Brake . . . . . . . . . 275Frame Alterations . . . . . . . 7Fuel Economy Driving . . . . 237

Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . 90Fuel Tank Caps . . . . . . . 267Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . 268

GGauge, Air Suspension Pressure . 90Gauge, Brake Application Pressure 90Gauge, Brake System Air Pressure 91Gauge, Coolant Temperature . . . 75Gauge, Drive Axle Oil Temperature89

Gauge, Fuel Level . . . . . . . 90Gauge, Oil Pressure . . . . . . 76Gauge, Pyrometer . . . . . . . 74Gauge, Turbo Boost Pressure . . 77

General Information . . . . . . 1Graphic Display . . . . . . . 114Graphic Display Controls . . . 115Graphic Display Overview . . 114Graphic Display Telltales . . . 117

HHeadlight Bulb Changing . . . 308Headlight Switch . . . . . . . 104Heated Mirror Switch . . . . . 109Heater, Parking . . . . . . . 189Heating and Air Conditioning . 174Hi Beam Telltale . . . . . . . . 87Hi/Lo Beam Switch . . . . . . 97High Altitude Operation . . . . 264Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . 30Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

IIdle Adjustment . . . . . . . 261Idle Shutdown . . . . . . . . 262Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . 248Inating Tires . . . . . . . . 314INFO Telltale . . . . . . . . . 79Info Telltale . . . . . . . . . 119Information and Stop Messages 118Inspecting Safety Belts . . . . . 55Instrument Cluster, Left Overview 74Instrument Light Dimmer . . . 113Instruments and Controls . . . . 70

Instruments, Overview . . . . . 70Interior lights . . . . . . . . 203

JJake-Brake . . . . . . . . . 107Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . 296Jump Starting Engine . . . . . 297

LLights, Daytime Running . . . 104Luggage Compartment . . . . . 29

Page 350: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 350/352

Index 345

MMain Instrument, Overview . . . 82Marker Interrupt Switch . . . . 106Master Warning Telltale . . . . . 84

Mirror Defrost Telltale . . . . . 88N

National Comfort Seat . . . . 197National Standard Seat . . . . 196No Charge Telltale . . . . . . . 81Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . 13

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . 83Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . 76Overload . . . . . . . . . . . 5Owner Information, General . . . 1Owner’s Information Package . . 2

PParking Brake . . . . . . . . 278Parking Brake Telltale . . . . . 87Parking Heater . . . . . . . . 189Parking Spring Brake . . . . . 281Power Outlets, 12 V . . . . . 305Power Outlets, 120 V . . . . . 306Power Steering . . . . . . . . 309Power Steering, General . . . . 309Power Studs . . . . . . . . . 304Pre-Trip Inspection and DailyMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . 32Preheater Telltale . . . . . . . . 78Pressure Gauge, Oil . . . . . . 76Pressure Gauge, Turbo Boost . . 77PTO Speed Adjustment . . . . 103Pyrometer Gauge . . . . . . . . 74

RRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Raise Hood . . . . . . . . . . 30Rear Axle Serial Number Loca-tions, Volvo . . . . . . . . . . 19Road Relay . . . . . . . . . 234Roadside Assistance . . . . . 341

SSafety Belt Replacement . . . . 59

Safety Belt Telltale . . . . . . . 87Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . 50Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . 6Safety Equipment . . . . . . . 68

Safety Guidelines, Electrical Sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Safety Guidelines, Fifth Wheel . 318Safety Information, Brakes . . 272Seat, National . . . . . . . . 196Seat, Stationary . . . . . . . 202Seat, Volvo . . . . . . . . . 199Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Selling Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 1Service Assistance . . . . . . 341Service Information . . . . . . 341Service Manuals . . . . . . . 342Sink in Sleeper . . . . . . . . 220Sleeper Bunk Restraints . . . . . 53Sleeper Bunks . . . . . . . . 212Sleeper Curtains . . . . . . . 230Sliding 5th Wheel Switch . . . 111Smoke Detector . . . . . . . 227Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . 83Spring Brake Chambers, Caging 339SRS Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 61Steering Column, Adjustable . 310Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Stop Engine Telltale . . . . . . 80Stop Telltale . . . . . . . . . 126Storage, Front Overhead . . . 206Storage, VN-610 & VN-660 . . 207Storage, VN-770 . . . . . . . 209Suspension Level Switch . . . 111

Switches, Left Cluster . . . . . 99Switches, Optional . . . . . . 112Switches, Pneumatic . . . . . 110Switches, Right Cluster . . . . 106

TTable In VN-770 . . . . . . . 217Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . 82TCS Switch . . . . . . . . . 106TCS Telltale . . . . . . . . . . 93

Page 351: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 351/352

346 Index

Telephone . . . . . . . . . . 234Television . . . . . . . . . . 235Telltale Bulb, Replacing . . . . . 95Telltale Overview . . . . . . . 72

Telltale, 5th Wheel Lock . . . . 86Telltale, ABS . . . . . . . . . 88Telltale, Air Suspension . . . . . 88Telltale, Auto Neutral . . . . . . 94Telltale, Check Transmission . . 92Telltale, Diff. Lock . . . . . . . 86Telltale, Hi Beam . . . . . . . 87Telltale, INFO . . . . . . . . . 79Telltale, Master Warning . . . . 84Telltale, Mirror Defrost . . . . . 88Telltale, No Charge . . . . . . . 81Telltale, Parking Brake . . . . . 87Telltale, Preheater . . . . . . . 78Telltale, Safety Belt . . . . . . 87Telltale, Stop Engine . . . . . . 80Telltale, TCS . . . . . . . . . 93Telltale, Transmission Temperature 92Temperature Gauge, Coolant . . . 75Tire Ination . . . . . . . . . 314Towing Information, General . 335Towing Procedures . . . . . . 337Traction Control System (TCS) 287Trailer Brake Hand Control . . 283Trailer Coupling Procedures . . 323Trailer Supply Valve . . . . . 278

Trailer Uncoupling . . . . . . 328Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge . . . 77Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . 97TV Antenna . . . . . . . . . 231

U Uphill Operation . . . . . . . 263

VVehicle Access . . . . . . . . . 20Vendor Component Information . 1Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . 185Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . 125Volvo Action Service . . . . . 341Volvo Comfort Seat . . . . . 199Volvo Standard Seat . . . . . 198VORAD Collision Warning System69

WWarning, temperature transmissionoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Welding On Frame . . . . . . . 7Welding Precautions . . . . . . 7Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . 315Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . 313Windows, Sleeper VN-660 & VN–770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Windshield Washer Capacity . . . 47Windshield Washers . . . . . . 98Winterfront . . . . . . . . . 255Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Page 352: Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

8/3/2019 Volvo Op Manual Vnl & Vnm 2001

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/volvo-op-manual-vnl-vnm-2001 352/352

Vehicle Identification Number (Chassis Number)

Truck Model & Serial

Engine Model & Serial

Transmission Model & Serial

Rear Axle Model & Serial

Your Truck Was Delivered By:

If you need breakdown assistance, contact the VASSupport Center, for towing or repair. VAS is available24 hours per day, 7 days per week at 1-800-528-6586.

A Volvo Customer Support Specialist will answer your questions or arrange for the assistance you need.

Volvo Action Service (VAS)Support Center

1-800-52-VOLVO